You are on page 1of 288

BTS3900 (Ver.

B)

Hardware Description
Issue

13

Date

2014-06-26

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document


Purpose
This document provides reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900 (Ver.B) (referred
to as BTS3900). It describes the configuration, functions, and specifications of the components
in the BTS3900 cabinet, and details such as cable types, cable connections, and connector
specifications.

Product Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name

Product Version

BTS3900

V100R007C00

BTS3900 WCDMA

V200R014C00

BTS3900 GSM

V100R014C00

BTS3900 LTE

V100R005C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l

System engineers

Base station installation engineers

Site maintenance engineers

Organization
1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description.
2 BTS3900 Cabinet
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

About This Document

This chapter describes the exteriors, boards, modules, and configurations of the BTS3900
cabinet, providing reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900.
3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet
This chapter describes the modules in the BTS3900 cabinet such as the RFU, RRU, BBU3900,
and EMU.
4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the BTS3900 Cabinet
This chapter describes configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power
distribution scheme, and components in the power system of the BTS3900 cabinet.
5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the BTS3900 Cabinet
The BTS3900 monitoring system monitors all boards and components in the cabinet. If any
board or component is faulty, an alarm is reported automatically. The alarm signals are collected
both inside and outside the cabinet by the UPEU, UEIU, or EMU to ensure that the entire base
station can be monitored.
6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet
This section describes the components in the BTS3900.
7 BTS3900 Cables
The BTS3900 cables consist of the PGND cable, power cable, transmission cable, CPRI cable,
signal cable, and RF cable.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

About This Document

Symbol

Description
Calls attention to important information, best practices and
tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in


Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

About This Document

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt


+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means


the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving


the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description..............................................................1
2 BTS3900 Cabinet............................................................................................................................9
2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900 Cabinet.................................................................................................................................10
2.2 Configurations of the BTS3900 Cabinet......................................................................................................................10
2.3 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet............................................................................................................13
2.3.1 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (Only RFUs Configured)................................................................14
2.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (RRUs and RFUs Configured)........................................................17
2.4 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications...........................................................................................................................19

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet.............................................................................................21


3.1 RFU..............................................................................................................................................................................22
3.1.1 GRFU.........................................................................................................................................................................22
3.1.2 DRFU.........................................................................................................................................................................26
3.1.3 WRFU........................................................................................................................................................................29
3.1.4 WRFUa Description..................................................................................................................................................33
3.1.5 LRFU.........................................................................................................................................................................37
3.1.6 MRFU........................................................................................................................................................................41
3.2 RRU..............................................................................................................................................................................44
3.3 BBU3900......................................................................................................................................................................45
3.3.1 BBU3900...................................................................................................................................................................45
3.3.2 BBU3900 Functions..................................................................................................................................................46
3.3.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................47
3.3.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment.......................................................................................................................................47
3.3.5 GTMU.......................................................................................................................................................................75
3.3.6 WMPT.......................................................................................................................................................................83
3.3.7 UMPT........................................................................................................................................................................89
3.3.8 LMPT.........................................................................................................................................................................98
3.3.9 WBBP......................................................................................................................................................................103
3.3.10 LBBP.....................................................................................................................................................................109
3.3.11 FAN.......................................................................................................................................................................118
3.3.12 UPEU.....................................................................................................................................................................120
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Contents

3.3.13 UEIU......................................................................................................................................................................124
3.3.14 UTRP.....................................................................................................................................................................125
3.3.15 USCU.....................................................................................................................................................................135
3.3.16 UBRI......................................................................................................................................................................138
3.3.17 UCIU.....................................................................................................................................................................140
3.4 GATM........................................................................................................................................................................143
3.5 EMU...........................................................................................................................................................................144

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the BTS3900 Cabinet.....................146


4.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables...................................................................147
4.2 Power Distribution Schemes of the Cabinet...............................................................................................................151
4.3 Power Equipment (DC/DC)........................................................................................................................................154
4.3.1 Components of the Power Equipment (DC/DC).....................................................................................................154
4.3.2 PSU (DC/DC)..........................................................................................................................................................154
4.3.3 Power Subrack (DC/DC).........................................................................................................................................156
4.4 Power Equipment (AC/DC)........................................................................................................................................157
4.4.1 Components of the Power Equipment (AC/DC).....................................................................................................157
4.4.2 PMU.........................................................................................................................................................................158
4.4.3 PSU (AC/DC)..........................................................................................................................................................161
4.4.4 Power Subrack (AC/DC).........................................................................................................................................163
4.5 DCDU-01....................................................................................................................................................................164
4.6 DCDU-03B.................................................................................................................................................................166

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the BTS3900 Cabinet..........................169


5.1 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinet.........................................................................................................................170
5.2 Customized Alarm Inputs...........................................................................................................................................172
5.3 Monitoring Boards of the BTS3900...........................................................................................................................174

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet....................................................................................175


6.1 Fan Assembly.............................................................................................................................................................176
6.2 ELU............................................................................................................................................................................178
6.3 PS4890 Cabinet..........................................................................................................................................................178

7 BTS3900 Cables..........................................................................................................................181
7.1 List of BTS3900 Cables.............................................................................................................................................183
7.2 Cable Connections......................................................................................................................................................190
7.2.1 Power Cable Connections........................................................................................................................................190
7.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections............................................................................................................................193
7.2.3 CPRI Cable Connections.........................................................................................................................................206
7.2.4 RF Cable Connections.............................................................................................................................................221
7.2.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections......................................................................................................................237
7.2.6 Signal Cable Connections........................................................................................................................................238
7.3 BTS3900 Power Cable...............................................................................................................................................242
7.3.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet..........................................................................................................................242
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Contents

7.3.2 Power Cable for the DCDU-01...............................................................................................................................244


7.3.3 DCDU-03B Power Cable........................................................................................................................................245
7.3.4 Power Cable for the BBU........................................................................................................................................246
7.3.5 Power Cable for the Fan Assembly.........................................................................................................................247
7.3.6 Power Cable for the RFU........................................................................................................................................247
7.3.7 RRU Power Cables..................................................................................................................................................248
7.3.8 Power Cable for the GATM....................................................................................................................................250
7.4 BTS3900 Transmission Cable....................................................................................................................................251
7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable.............................................................................................................................................................251
7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable.............................................................................................................................................254
7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable........................................................................................................................................255
7.4.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports..........................................................................................256
7.4.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports...................................................................................................257
7.5 BTS3900 Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................................257
7.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU....................................................................................................................257
7.5.2 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)......................................................................................................258
7.5.3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)......................................................................................................259
7.5.4 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal Cable......................................................................................................................260
7.5.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Assembly......................................................................................................261
7.5.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU....................................................................................................................262
7.5.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATM.................................................................................................................262
7.5.8 FMU-GATM Monitoring Signal Cable...................................................................................................................263
7.5.9 RET Control Signal Cable.......................................................................................................................................264
7.5.10 BBU interconnection signal cable.........................................................................................................................265
7.5.11 BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................................266
7.5.12 GPS Clock Signal Cable........................................................................................................................................268
7.5.13 GPS Jumper...........................................................................................................................................................268
7.5.14 Signal Cable for the ELU......................................................................................................................................269
7.5.15 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance....................................................................................................................270
7.5.16 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations........................................................................................................270
7.6 BTS3900 RF Cable.....................................................................................................................................................272
7.6.1 RF Jumper................................................................................................................................................................272
7.6.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal Cable.....................................................................................................................................273
7.7 CPRI Electrical Cable.................................................................................................................................................273
7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable..............................................................................................................................................274
7.9 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................................278
7.10 Equipotential Cable..................................................................................................................................................279

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description

Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware


Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description.

13 (2014-06-26)
This is the thirteenth commercial release.
Compared with issue 12 (2014-02-24), no topic is added.
Compared with issue 12 (2014-02-24), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic

Change Description

3.3.7 UMPT

Changed the signaling specifications of the


boards in LTE FDD mode.

3.3.8 LMPT
3.3.10 LBBP

Compared with issue 12 (2014-02-24), no topic is deleted.

12 (2014-02-24)
This is the twelfth commercial release.
Compared with issue 11 (2013-11-28), this issue includes the following new information:
l

7.5.8 FMU-GATM Monitoring Signal Cable

Compared with issue 11 (2013-11-28), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description

Topic

Change Description

7.1 List of BTS3900 Cables

l Added the information of GATM power


cable, RET control signal cable, and
FMU-GATM monitoring signal cable.
l Added the installation position
information of RF jumper when GATM is
configured.

Compared with issue 11 (2013-11-28), no topic is deleted.

11 (2013-11-28)
This is the eleventh commercial release.
Compared with issue 10 (2013-08-23), no topic is added or deleted.
Compared with issue 10 (2013-08-23), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic

Change Description

5.2 Customized Alarm Inputs

Modified the configuration about the number


of customized alarm inputs for monitoring
boards.

3.3.6 WMPT

Changed the description of the TST port.

3.3.7 UMPT
3.3.5 GTMU
3.3.8 LMPT
3.3.14 UTRP

Added the UTRPa.

10 (2013-08-23)
This is the tenth commercial release.
Compared with issue 09 (2013-05-27), this issue includes the following new information:
l

4.6 DCDU-03B

7.3.3 DCDU-03B Power Cable

7.3.7 RRU Power Cables

7.5.9 RET Control Signal Cable

Compared with issue 09 (2013-05-27), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description

Topic

Change Description

l 4.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level


Circuit Breakers and Power Cables

Added the information when a BTS3900 is


configured with RFUs and RRUs.

l 4.2 Power Distribution Schemes of the


Cabinet

Compared with issue 09 (2013-05-27), no topic is deleted.

09 (2013-05-27)
This is the ninth commercial release.
Compared with issue 08 (2013-02-20), no topic is added or deleted.
Compared with issue 08 (2013-02-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic

Change Description

2.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900


Cabinet (RRUs and RFUs Configured)

Added restrictions on the boards in the base


stations configured with RFUs and RRUs.

2.4 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications

Added the noise specifications of the cabinet.

l 3.3.6 WMPT

Added specifications of these boards.

l 3.3.7 UMPT
l 3.3.8 LMPT
l 3.3.9 WBBP
l 3.3.10 LBBP
7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable

Added information about the classification of


CPRI fiber optic cables and the principles for
selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.

08 (2013-02-20)
This is the eighth commercial release.
Compared with issue 07 (2012-12-30), this issue includes the following new information:
l

3.1.4 WRFUa Description

RF Cable Connections for the WRFUa

Compared with issue 07 (2012-12-30), no information is changed or deleted.

07 (2012-12-30)
This is the seventh commercial release.
Compared with issue 06 (2012-11-10), no topic is added or deleted.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description

Compared with issue 06 (2012-11-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content

Change Description

7.5.10 BBU interconnection signal cable

Modified the exterior and length of the BBU


interconnection signal cable connecting
WBBPf to WBBPf.

06 (2012-11-10)
This is the sixth commercial release.
Compared with issue 05 (2012-09-15), this issue includes the following new information:
l

3.3.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications

RF Cable Connections for Mixed RFU Configuration

Compared with issue 05 (2012-09-15), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content

Change Description

3.3.7 UMPT

Changed the description of indicators on the


UMPT.

4.5 DCDU-01

Added the technical specifications of


DCDU-01.

l 3.1.6 MRFU

Added the technical specifications of the


RFUs.

l 3.1.2 DRFU
l 3.1.1 GRFU
l 3.1.3 WRFU
l 3.1.5 LRFU

Compared with issue 05 (2012-09-15), no topic is deleted.

05 (2012-09-15)
This is the fifth commercial release.
Compared with issue 04 (2012-08-05), no topic is added or deleted.
Compared with issue 04 (2012-08-05), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Topic

Change Description

7.6.1 RF Jumper

Added the length of the cable.

7.9 PGND Cables

Changed the length of the cable.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description

04 (2012-08-05)
This is the fourth commercial release.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-29), no topic is added.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-29), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic

Change Description

3.3.5 GTMU

Added the TRX specifications of the board.

3.3.10 LBBP

Added the information of combined


bandwidths.

3.3.14 UTRP

Deleted the UTRPb4 used in LTE mode.

Transmission Cable Connections for a


Single-Mode Base Station

Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-29), this issue deletes the following topics:
l

MRFU V3

RF Cable Connections for MRFU V3

03 (2012-06-29)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-20), no topic is added or deleted.
Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic

Change Description

3.3.15 USCU

Added the information of the USCUb14 and


USCUb22.

l 7.3.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet

Added the length of the cables.

l 7.9 PGND Cables


l 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable
l 7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable
l 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
l 7.5.11 BBU Alarm Cable
l 7.5.13 GPS Jumper
l 7.5.10 BBU interconnection signal
cable

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description

02 (2012-06-20)
This is the second commercial release.
Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-25), no topic is added or deleted.
Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic

Change Description

3.3.9 WBBP

Changed the description of the indicators on


the boards.

3.3.10 LBBP
3.3.15 USCU
l CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM
Only Base Station

Added the CPRI cable connections of RFU


+RRU configurations in each mode.

l CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS


Only Base Station
l CPRI Cable Connections for an LTE
Only Base Station
l CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM
+UMTS Base Station
l CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM
+LTE Base Station
l CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS
+LTE Base Station
l CPRI Cable Connections for a TripleMode Base Station

01 (2012-04-25)
This is the first commercial release.
Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-20), no topic is added or deleted.
Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content

Change Description

3.3.6 WMPT

Changed the description of the indicators on


the boards.

3.3.7 UMPT
3.3.5 GTMU
3.3.8 LMPT
3.3.9 WBBP
3.3.11 FAN
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description

Content

Change Description

3.3.12 UPEU
3.3.14 UTRP
3.3.15 USCU
3.3.17 UCIU
3.3.10 LBBP
3.3.16 UBRI
3.3.10 LBBP

Added the cell bandwidth of the LBBP.

7.5.10 BBU interconnection signal cable

Changed the exterior of the inter-BBU signal


cable.

Transmission Cable Connections for a


Triple-Mode Base Station

Added Transmission Cable Connections in


the GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1) (BBUs
cascaded) scenario.

Draft B (2012-03-20)
This is the Draft release.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-10), no topic is added or deleted.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content

Change Description

2.2 Configurations of the BTS3900


Cabinet

Updated the figures of cabinets.

2.3.1 Application Scenario of the BTS3900


Cabinet (Only RFUs Configured)

Optimized the figures of cabinet


configuration.

2.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900


Cabinet (RRUs and RFUs Configured)
6.2 ELU

Updated the figure of ELU.

The whole document

Made some editorial changes.

Draft A (2012-02-10)
This is the Draft release.
Compared with issue MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R013C00, GSM-BTS
V100R013C00, eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue adds the following topics:
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

1 Changes in BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description

2.4 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications

2.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (RRUs and RFUs Configured)

3.2 RRU

3.3.7 UMPT

7.5.16 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations

7.5.15 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance

CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station

7.5.10 BBU interconnection signal cable

Compared with issue MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R013C00, GSM-BTS


V100R013C00, eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue incorporates the following change:
Content

Change Description

The whole document

Reorganized the document and optimized


some descriptions and figures.

Compared with issue MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R013C00, GSM-BTS


V100R013C00, eNodeB V100R004C00, no content is deleted.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the exteriors, boards, modules, and configurations of the BTS3900
cabinet, providing reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900.
2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900 Cabinet
The BTS3900 cabinet is a vertical cabinet, which is designed in compliance with the IEC297
standard.
2.2 Configurations of the BTS3900 Cabinet
This section describes the interior and configurations of the BTS3900 cabinet.
2.3 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet
The BTS3900 supports various cabinets to meet the requirements of different RFU
configurations and space required for customer equipment. In different scenarios, BTS3900 can
be configured with only RFUs or with both RFUs and the RRUs.
2.4 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications
BTS3900 engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment
specifications, and environment specifications.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900 Cabinet


The BTS3900 cabinet is a vertical cabinet, which is designed in compliance with the IEC297
standard.
Figure 2-1 shows the exterior of the BTS3900 cabinet.
Figure 2-1 Exterior of the BTS3900 cabinet

2.2 Configurations of the BTS3900 Cabinet


This section describes the interior and configurations of the BTS3900 cabinet.
There are three types of BTS3900 cabinets: the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet, BTS3900 DC
(+24 V) cabinet, and BTS3900 AC cabinet.

Configurations of the BTS3900 DC Cabinet


Figure 2-2 shows the interior of the BTS3900 DC cabinet.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 2-2 Interior of the BTS3900 DC cabinet

A. BTS3900 DC (-48V) Cabinet

B. BTS3900 DC (+24V) Cabinet

Table 2-1 describes the components in the cabinet.


Table 2-1 Components in the BTS3900 DC cabinet

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

No.

Module

Optional
or
Mandator
y

Maximum
Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

Remark

Filler
panel

Optional

If a slot in the RFU subrack is vacant,


insert a filler panel into the slot. This
ensures normal ventilation of the
cabinet.

RFU

Mandatory

The RFU modulates and demodulates


baseband signals and RF signals,
processes data, and combines and
divides signals.

Fan
Assembl
y

Mandatory

The fan assembly dissipates the heat


from the cabinet.

Air
intake
vent

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

No.

Module

Optional
or
Mandator
y

Maximum
Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

Remark

BBU390
0

Mandatory

The BBU3900 processes the baseband


signals.

DCDU01

Mandatory

The DCDU-01 provides DC power for


all components in the cabinet.

Power
Equipme
nt (DC/
DC)

Mandatory

The power system (DC/DC) converts


external +24 V DC power into -48 V DC
power and provides power for all
components in the cabinet.

Remaini
ng space

There is a 3 U space remaining in the


BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet for
customized equipment. The customized
equipment must be able to work properly
at a temperature equal to or higher than
+55C. The BTS3900 DC (-48 V)
cabinet cannot provide power for
customized transmission equipment.

Configurations of the BTS3900 AC Cabinet


Figure 2-3 shows the interior of the BTS3900 AC cabinet.
Figure 2-3 Interior of the BTS3900 AC cabinet

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 2-2 describes the components in the cabinet.


Table 2-2 Components in the BTS3900 AC cabinet
No.

Module

Optional
or
Mandator
y

Maximum
Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

Remark

Filler
panel

Optional

If a slot in the RFU subrack is vacant,


insert a filler panel into the slot. This
ensures normal ventilation of the
cabinet.

RFU

Mandatory

The RFU modulates and demodulates


baseband signals and RF signals,
processes data, and combines and
divides signals.

Fan
Assembl
y

Mandatory

The fan assembly dissipates the heat


from the cabinet.

Air
intake
vent

BBU390
0

Mandatory

The BBU3900 processes the baseband


signals.

DCDU-0
1

Mandatory

The DCDU-01 provides DC power for


all components in the cabinet.

Power
Equipme
nt (AC/
DC)

Mandatory

The power system (AC/DC) converts


external 220 V AC single-phase power,
220 V AC three-phase power, and 110 V
AC dual-live-wire power into -48 V DC
power and provides power for all
components in the cabinet.

2.3 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet


The BTS3900 supports various cabinets to meet the requirements of different RFU
configurations and space required for customer equipment. In different scenarios, BTS3900 can
be configured with only RFUs or with both RFUs and the RRUs.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

2.3.1 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (Only RFUs


Configured)
This section describes the configurations of a single-mode, dual-mode, and triple-mode base
station if only RFUs are configured in a BTS3900 cabinet.

Cabinet Configuration Rules


l

A maximum of two indoor cabinets can be configured at one site and a maximum of 12
RFUs can be configured in two cabinets of a site. If the number of RFUs exceeds 12, an
extra site is required.

In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, only one BBU is configured.

In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured.

Both the DC cabinet and AC cabinets support combined cabinet scenarios.

If cabinets are stacked, the BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet is used preferentially. In special
scenarios, for example, the space is insufficient, +24 V DC or AC cabinets can be used.
However, the highest operating temperature of the cabinets is 50C.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Scenario


Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 show the application scenarios of the BTS3900 in singleor dual-mode.
Figure 2-4 BTS3900 in single- or dual-mode scenario (single cabinet)

1. BTS3900 DC (-48 V)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

2. BTS3900 DC (+24 V)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3. BTS3900 AC

14

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 2-5 BTS3900 in single- or dual-mode scenario (side-by-side installation)

1. BTS3900 DC (-48V)

2. BTS3900 DC (+24V)

3. BTS3900 AC

Figure 2-6 BTS3900 in single- or dual-mode scenario (stack installation)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Scenario


Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8 show the configurations of the BTS3900 cabinet in a triple-mode
scenario.
Figure 2-7 BTS3900 in triple-mode scenario (side-by-side installation)

1. BTS3900 DC (-48V)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

2. BTS3900 DC (+24V)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3. BTS3900 AC

16

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 2-8 BTS3900 in triple-mode scenario (stack installation)

2.3.2 Application Scenario of the BTS3900 Cabinet (RRUs and RFUs


Configured)
This section describes the configurations of a single-mode, dual-mode, and triple-mode base
station when BTS3900 is configured with both RRUs and RFUs.

Cabinet Configuration Rules


l

In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, the BTS3900 supports a maximum configuration


of six RFUs with six RRUs. An additional site is needed when configuration exceeds six
RFUs and six RRUs.

In a triple-mode scenario, the BTS3900 supports a maximum configuration of twelve RFUs


with six RRUs. An additional site is needed when configuration exceeds twelve RFUs and
six RRUs.

The RRUs are connected to the BTS3900 through optical cables, and the RRUs' power is
supplied by a DCDU-03B installed on a wall.

Only the BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet applies to the scenario where both the RRUs and
RFUs are configured.

In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, only one BBU is configured.

In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured.

When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configured
with a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the
GTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Scenario


Figure 2-9 shows the configurations of the BTS3900 in single- or dual-mode scenario.
Figure 2-9 BTS3900 in single- or dual-mode scenario

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Scenario


Figure 2-10 and Figure 2-11 shows the configurations of the BTS3900 cabinet in a triple-mode
scenario.
Figure 2-10 BTS3900 in triple-mode scenario (Cabinets installed side by side)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 2-11 BTS3900 in triple-mode scenario (Stacked cabinets)

2.4 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications


BTS3900 engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment
specifications, and environment specifications.

Input Power Specifications


BTS3900 supports -48 V DC, +24 V DC, 110 V AC, and 220 V AC power input. Table 2-3 lists
the input power specifications.
Table 2-3 Input power specifications of a BTS3900

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Input Power

Voltage Range

-48V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

+24V DC

+21.6 V DC to +29 V DC

220V AC (single-phase)

176 V AC to 290 V AC

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

2 BTS3900 Cabinet

Input Power

Voltage Range

220V AC (three-phase)

176 V AC to 290 V AC

110V AC (dual-live-wire)

90 V AC to 135 V AC

Equipment Specifications
The following table lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900 cabinet.
Table 2-4 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900 cabinet
Item

Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x D)

Cabinet (without the base): 900 mm x 600


mm x 450 mm (35.43 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.72
in.)
Base: 40 mm x 600 mm x 420 mm (1.57 in.
x 23.62 in. x 16.54 in.)

Weight

135 kg (297.675 lb) (full configuration,


with one BBU and six RFUs, and without
transmission devices)

NOTE

For other engineering specifications of the BTS3900 cabinet, see 3900 Series Base Station Technical
Description.

Environment Specifications
Table 2-5 lists the environment specifications of the BTS3900.
Table 2-5 Environment specifications

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Item

Specifications

Noise

Meeting the ETS 300 753 3.1 standard

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the modules in the BTS3900 cabinet such as the RFU, RRU, BBU3900,
and EMU.
3.1 RFU
The radio frequency unit (RFU) modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals,
processes data, combines and divides signals. The types of RFUs vary according to different
modes.
3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna
system.
3.3 BBU3900
This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and
their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.
3.4 GATM
The GSM Antenna and TMA control Module (GATM) controls the antenna and TMA.
3.5 EMU
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMU) is an environmental monitoring device that monitors
environmental conditions of the equipment room.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

3.1 RFU
The radio frequency unit (RFU) modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals,
processes data, combines and divides signals. The types of RFUs vary according to different
modes.

3.1.1 GRFU
GSM radio frequency unit (GRFU) is an RF unit of GSM radio filter and applies to GSM only
scenario.

Panel
GRFUs fall into three types: GRFU V1, GRFU V2, and GRFU V2a. The three types of GRFUs
can be identified by their labels. As shown in Figure 3-1, there is "V0" or "V1" on the label of
a GRFU V1, there is "V2" on the label of a GRFU V2, and there is "V2a" on the label of a GRFU
V2a.
Figure 3-1 GRFU panel

Function
A GRFU performs modulation and demodulation between baseband signals and radio frequency
(RF) signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

In addition,the GRFU has the following functions:


l

Converts the direct frequency conversion technology, modulates the baseband signals for
the GSM TX band. After filtering and amplification, the baseband signals are transmitted
to the antenna system through the duplexer.

Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received
signals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After an amplification, analog-to-digital
conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the
IF signals are sent to the baseband unit (BBU) for further processing.

Provides power control and VSWR detection.

Supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier (TMA) and controls the remote electrical
tilt (RET) antenna.

Performs reverse power detection.

Synthesizes frequencies and tests loops.

Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from
loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.

Principles
A GRFU consists of a high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and
dual-duplexer. Figure 3-2 shows the logical structure of the GRFU.
Figure 3-2 Logical structure of the GRFU

Indicators
The six indicators on the GRFU panel indicate the operating status of the GRFU. Table 3-1
describes the indicators on the GRFU panel.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-1 Indicators on the GRFU Panel


Indicato
r

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the module


breaks down or is verifying the software
version.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

The module is loading software.

Off

There is no power supply, or the module


breaks down.

Steady on

Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are


generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms may


be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity
for module replacement is uncertain.

Off

No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is


generated.

Steady on

The module works properly with the TX


channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module works properly with the TX


channel disabled.

Steady on

The VSWR alarm is generated on the


ANT_TX/RXA port.

Off

No VSWR alarm is generated.

Steady green

The CPRI link is available.

Steady red

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off

The small form-factor pluggable (SFP)


module is not properly installed, or the
optical module is powered off.

Steady green

The CPRI link is available.

Steady red

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

ALM

ACT

VSWR

CPRI0

CPRI1

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Red

Green

Red

Red and
green

Red and
green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicato
r

Color

Status

Description

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off

The SFP module is not properly


installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Ports
Table 3-2 describes the ports on the GRFU panel.
Table 3-2 Ports on the GRFU Panel
Port Type

Silkscree
n

Connector
Type

Description

RF port

ANT_RX
B

DIN
connector

Connects to the antenna system

ANT_TX/
RXA

DIN
connector

Connects to the antenna system

CPRI0

SFP female
connector

Connects to the BBU, or an upper-level RFU


in the cascading mode

CPRI1

SFP female
connector

Connects to a lower-level RFU during the


cascading

Interconnectio
n port for
receiving RF
signals

RX_INB

QMA female
connector

Receives the diversity signals

RX_OUT
A

QMA female
connector

Transmits the main signals

Power supply
port

PWR

3V3 power
connector

Feeds in power

Monitoring
port

MON

RJ45
connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

CPRI port

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the GRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.
For the technical specifications of GRFU, see section GRFU Technical Specifications in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

3.1.2 DRFU
Double radio frequency unit (DRFU) is an RF unit of GSM radio filter and applies to GSM only
scenario.

Panel
Figure 3-3 shows the DRFU panel.
Figure 3-3 DRFU panel

Function
The DRFU performs modulation, demodulation, data processing, and combining and dividing
for baseband signals and radio frequency (RF) signals.
In addition, the DRFU provides the following functions:
l

Converts the direct frequency conversion technology, modulates the baseband signals for
the GSM TX band. After filtering and amplification, the baseband signals are transmitted
to the antenna system through the duplexer.

Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received
signals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital
conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the
IF signals are sent to a baseband unit (BBU) for further processing.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Performs power control.

Performs reverse power detection.

Synthesizes frequencies and tests loops.

Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from
loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.

A DRFU consists of a high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and
dual-duplexer. Figure 3-4 shows the logical structure of the DRFU.
Figure 3-4 Logical structure of the DRFU

Indicators
There are six indicators on the DRFU panel, indicating its operating status. Table 3-3 describes
the status of the indicators on the DRFU.
Table 3-3 Status of the Indicators on the DRFU
Indicator

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the module


breaks down or is verifying the
software version.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

The module is loading software.

Off

There is no power supply, or the module


breaks down.

Steady on

Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are


generated, and the module must be
replaced.

ALM

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Red

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicator

ACT

VSWR

CPRI0

CPRI1

Color

Green

Red

Red and
green

Red and
green

Status

Description

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms may


be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the
necessity for module replacement is
uncertain.

Off

No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is


generated.

Steady on

The module works properly with the


TX channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module works properly with the


TX channel disabled.

Steady on

The VSWR alarm is generated on the


ANT1 port.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The VSWR alarm is generated on the


ANT2 port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

The VSWR alarm is generated on the


ANT1 and ANT2 ports.

Off

No VSWR alarm is generated.

Steady green

The CPRI link is available.

Steady red

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off

The small form-factor pluggable (SFP)


module is not properly installed, or the
optical module is powered off.

Steady green

The CPRI link is available.

Steady red

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off

The SFP module is not properly


installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Ports
Table 3-4 describes the ports on the DRFU.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-4 Ports on the DRFU


Port Type

Silkscreen on
the Port

Connector
Type

Description

Port for
transceiving
RF signals

ANT1

DIN female
connector

Connects to the antenna system.

CPRI port

CPRI0

SFP female
connector

Connects to a lower-level radio


frequency unit (RFU) during the
cascading.

ANT2

CPRI1
Interconnecti
on port for
receiving RF
signals

Power
supply port

RX1/IN

Connects to the BBU, or an upper-level


RFU in the cascading mode.
QMA female
connector

Receives the diversity signals in


antenna channel 1.

RX1/OUT

Transmits the diversity signals in


antenna channel 1.

RX2/IN

Receives the diversity signals in


antenna channel 2.

RX2/OUT

Transmits the diversity signals in


antenna channel 2.

PWR

3V3 power
connector

Feeds in power.

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the DRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.
For the technical specifications of DRFU, see section DRFU Technical Specifications in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.3 WRFU
WCDMA Radio Frequency (WRFU) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter and applies to UMTS
only scenario.

Panel
Figure 3-5 shows the panel of the WRFU.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-5 Panel of the WRFU

Functions
The functions of the WRFU are as follows:
l

Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the transmit channel. The
baseband signals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplified
or being combined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antenna
for radio transmission.

Receives UL RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received
signals to IF signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital downconversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to the
BBU for further processing.

Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detection

Provides reverse power detection

Supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier (TMA) and controls the remote electrical
tilt (RET) antenna.

Provides frequency synthesis and loopback test

Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and
detects alarms

Supports 40 W (2 carriers) and 80 W (4 carriers) power outputs

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Principle
The WRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier,
and duplex unit. Figure 3-6 shows the principle of the WRFU.
Figure 3-6 Principle of the WRFU

LEDs
Table 3-5 describes the LEDs on the WRFU panel.
Table 3-5 LEDs on the WRFU panel
Label
RUN

ALM

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Color
Green

Red

State

Description

ON

There is power supply, but the module


breaks down or is verifying the
software version.

OFF

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module is loading software.

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

There is no power supply, or the


module breaks down.

ON

Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are


generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms may


be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the
necessity for module replacement is
uncertain.

OFF

No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is


generated.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Label
ACT

VSWR

CPRI0

CPRI1

Color
Green

Red

Red/Green

Red/Green

State

Description

ON

The module works properly with the


TX channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module works properly with the


TX channel disabled.

ON (red)

VSWR-related alarms are generated


on the ANT_TX/RXA port.

OFF (red)

No VSWR alarm is generated.

On (green)

The CPRI links are normal.

On (red)

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

OFF

The SFP is out of position, or the


optical module is powered off.

On (green)

The CPRI links are normal.

On (red)

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

OFF

The SFP is out of position, or the


optical module is powered off.

Ports
Table 3-6 describes the ports on the WRFU panel.
Table 3-6 Ports on the WRFU panel
Port

Label

Connector

Description

RF port

ANT_RXB

DIN
connector

RF RX port for connecting to the antenna


system

ANT_TX/
RXA

DIN
connector

RF TX/RX port for connecting to the


antenna system

CPRI0

SFP female
connector

Connected to the BBU, or the upper-level


WRFU during the cascading

CPRI1

SFP female
connector

Connected to the lower-level WRFU


during the cascading

CPRI

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Port

Label

Connector

Description

Interconnectio
n port for RF
RX signals

RX_INB

QMA female
connector

Receives the diversity signals.

RX_OUTA

QMA female
connector

Transmits the main signals.

Power supply
socket

PWR

3V3 power
connector

Feeding power

Monitoring
port

MON

RJ45
connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the WRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.
For the technical specifications of WRFU, see section WRFU Technical Specifications in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.4 WRFUa Description


This section describes WRFUa hardware, including panels, functions, principles, indicators, and
ports.

Panel
The following figure shows the WRFUa panel.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-7 WRFUa panel

Principle
A WRFUa consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and
duplexer. The following figure shows the logic structure of a WRFUa.
Figure 3-8 Logic structure of a WRFUa

Function
A WRFUa performs the following functions:
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Performs digital up-convert on intermediate frequency (IF) signals on the transmitting


channel, and modulates baseband signals to RF signals. After being filtered and amplified,
the RF signals are sent by the duplex filter to the antenna.

Receives RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received signals
to IF signals. After being amplified, analog-to-digital converted, digital down-converted,
matched filtered, and digital automatic gain control (DAGC) processed, the IF signals are
sent to the BBU for further processing.

Controls power.

Tests the VSWR.

Manages the TMA power feeding and RET antennas.

Controls the DPD feedback. That is, a WRFUa takes samples of output signals, analyzes
the samples, and performs linear control on transmit signals based on the analysis.

Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from out-of-synchronization, and
detects alarms.

Indicator
Table 3-7 describes the indicators on the WRFUa panel.
Table 3-7 Indicators on the WRFUa panel
Indicato
r

Color

State

Meaning

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the module


is faulty or the version is being checked.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module is working.

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

The module is loading software.

Steady off

There is no power supply or the module


is faulty.

Steady on

Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are


generated and the module needs to be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms may


be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, you need to
locate the fault before deciding whether
to replace the module.

Steady off

No alarm (excluding the VSWR alarm)


is generated.

Steady on

The module is functioning properly


with TX channels enabled.

ALM

ACT

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Red

Green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicato
r

VSWR

CPRI0

CPRI1

Color

Red

Red or
green

Red or
green

State

Meaning

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module is functioning properly


with TX channels disabled.

Steady on

A VSWR alarm is generated on the


ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

A VSWR alarm is generated on the


ANT_RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

VSWR alarms are generated on the


ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXB ports.

Steady off

No VSWR alarm is generated.

Steady green

The CPRI link is functioning properly.

Steady red

The optical module fails to receive


signals.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is out of lock.

Steady off

The SFP module is not properly


installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Steady green

The CPRI link is functioning properly.

Steady red

The optical module fails to receive


signals.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is out of lock.

Steady off

The SFP module is not properly


installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Port
Table 3-8 describes the ports on the WRFUa panel.
Table 3-8 Ports on the WRFUa panel

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Port Type

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

RF port

ANT_RXB

DIN
connector

Connects to the antenna system for


receiving signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Port Type

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

ANT_TX/
RXA

DIN
connector

Connects to the antenna system for


transiting and receiving signals.

CPRI0

SFP female
connector

Connects to the BBU or connects to the


cascaded upper-level WRFUa.

CPRI1

SFP female
connector

Connects to the cascaded lower-level


WRFUa.

Interconnectio
n port for
receiving RF
signals

RX_INB

QMA female
connector

Receives diversity signals.

RX_OUTA

QMA female
connector

Transmits main signals.

Power port

PWR

3V3
connector

Connects the power equipment.

Monitoring
port

MON

RJ45
connector

Performs monitoring and commissioning.

CPRI port

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the WRFUa, which include supported
modes and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna
capability.
For the technical specifications of WRFUa, see section WRFUa Technical Specifications in
the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.5 LRFU
LTE Radio Frequency Unit (LRFU) is an RF unit of LTE Frenquency Division Duplex (FDD)
and applies to LTE Only scenario.

Panel
Figure 3-9 shows the panel of the LRFU.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-9 Panel of the LRFU

Functions
The LRFU processes uplink and downlink services and controls and monitors internal boards
or modules. Figure 3-10 shows the logical structure of the LRFU.
Figure 3-10 Logical structure of the LRFU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

LEDs
Table 3-9 describes the LEDs on the panel of the LRFU.
Table 3-9 LEDs on the LRFU
Label

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

On

There is power supply, but the module


breaks down or is verifying the
software version.

Off

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module is loading software.

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

There is no power supply, or the


module breaks down.

On

Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are


generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms may


be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the
necessity for module replacement is
uncertain.

Off

No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is


generated.

On

The module works properly (TX


channel enabled).

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module is running (TX channel


disabled).

On (red)

A VSWR-related alarm is generated at


the ANT_TX/RXA port.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

A VSWR-related alarm is generated at


the ANT_TX/RXB port.

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

A VSWR-related alarm is generated at


the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/
RXB ports.

Off (red)

No VSWR alarm is generated.

On (green)

The CPRI links are normal.

On (red)

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

ALM

ACT

VSWR

CPRI0

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Red

Green

Red

Red/Green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Label

CPRI1

Color

Red/Green

Status

Description

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off

The SFP module is out of position, or


the optical module is powered off.

On (green)

The CPRI links are normal.

On (red)

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off

The SFP module is out of position, or


the optical module is powered off.

Port
Table 3-10 describes the ports on the panel of the LRFU.
Table 3-10 Ports on the panel of the LRFU
Port

Label

Connector

Description

RF port

ANT_T
X/RXB

DIN connector

RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna


system

ANT_T
X/RXA

DIN connector

CPRI0

SFP female
connector

Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI0


port and CPRI1 port work in mutual backup
mode.

CPRI1

SFP female
connector

Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI1


port and CPRI0 port work in mutual backup
mode.

Power
supply
socket

PWR

3V3 power
connector

Used for feeding -48 V DC input power

Monitoring
port

MON

RJ45 connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

CPRI port

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the LRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency Bands, RF Specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

For the technical specifications of LRFU, see section LRFU Technical Specifications in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.6 MRFU
Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit (MRFU) is a type of RF unit that can work in multiple radio
frequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.

Panel
MRFUs fall into three types: MRFU V1, MRFU V2, and MRFU V2a. The three types of MRFUs
can be identified by their labels. As shown in Figure 3-11, there is "V0" or "V1" on the label of
a MRFU V1, there is "V2" on the label of a MRFU V2, and there is "V2a" on the label of a
MRFU V2a.
Figure 3-11 MRFU Panel

Function
The functions of MRFU are as follows:
l

Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the intermediate
frequency (IF) signals, filters and amplifies the signals and then transmits the signals to the
antenna through the duplexer.

Receives radio frequency (RF) signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals
to IF signals, and then transmits them to the baseband unit (BBU) after an amplification,

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, and Digital


Automatic Gain Control (DAGC).
l

Performs power control.

Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ration (VSWR) detection.

Supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier (TMA) and controls the remote electrical
tilt (RET) antenna.

Controls Digital Predistortion (DPD) based on feedback signals.

Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from
loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.

Principles
A MRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and
duplexer. Figure 3-12 shows the principle of the MRFU.
Figure 3-12 Principle of the MRFU

Indicators
Table 3-11 describes the indicators on the MRFU.
Table 3-11 Indicators on the MRFU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Indicato
r

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the module


breaks down or is verifying the software
version.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The module works properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

The module is loading software.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicato
r

ALM

ACT

VSWR

CPRI0

CPRI1

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Color

Red

Green

Red

Red and
green

Red and
green

Status

Description

Off

There is no power supply, or the module


breaks down.

Steady on

Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are


generated, and the module must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

Alarms are generated. The alarms may


be caused by the faults on the related
boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity
for module replacement is uncertain.

Off

No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is


generated.

Steady on

The MRFU works properly with the TX


channel enabled.

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The MRFU works properly with the TX


channel disabled.

Steady on

The VSWR alarm is generated on the


ANT_TX/RXA port.

Off

No VSWR alarm is generated.

Steady green

The CPRI link is available.

Steady red

The optical module fails to receive


signals.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Off

The small form-factor pluggable (SFP)


module is not properly installed, or the
optical module is powered off.

Steady green

The CPRI link is available.

Steady red

The reception of the optical module is


abnormal, and an alarm is generated.

Blinking red (on for 1s


and off for 1s)

The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.

Off

The SFP module is not properly


installed, or the optical module is
powered off.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Ports
Table 3-12 describes the ports on the MRFU.
Table 3-12 Port on the MRFU
Port Type
RF port

Silkscreen

Connector
Type

Description

ANT_RXB

DIN
connector

RF RX port for connecting to the antenna


system

ANT_TX/
RXA

DIN
connector

RF TX/RX port for connecting to the


antenna system

CPRI0

SFP female
connector

Connects to the BBU

CPRI1

SFP female
connector

Connects to the BBU

Interconnectio
n port for
receiving RF
signals

RX_INB

QMA female
connector

Receives the diversity signals

RX_OUTA

QMA female
connector

Transmits the main signals

Power supply
port

PWR

3V3 power
connector

Feeding -48 V DC power

Monitoring
port

MON

RJ45
connector

Port for monitoring and commissioning

CPRI port

Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of the MRFU, which include supported modes
and frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capability.
For the technical specifications of MRFU, see section MRFU Technical Specifications in the
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna
system.
The RRU implements the following functions:
l

Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data for the
communication between the BBU and the RRU.

The RX channel receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the received
signals to IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital (A/D)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog (D/A)


conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.
l

Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antenna
path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.

For details about various types of RRUs, see the hardware description of the corresponding RRU.

3.3 BBU3900
This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and
their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.

3.3.1 BBU3900
The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
The dimensions of the BBU3900 are 86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (3.39 in. x 17.4 in. x 12.2 in.)
(H x W x D), as shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 BBU3900

The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). It is used
during base station commissioning.
l

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting
ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-14.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-14 ESN (1)

If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear of
the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15 ESN (2)

3.3.2 BBU3900 Functions


The BBU3900 is a baseband processing unit. It processes the baseband signals of the base station.
The BBU3900 performs the following functions:
l

Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC or RNC.

Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.

Provides USB(1) ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration
data can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.

Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 to operate
and maintain the base station.

Processes uplink and downlink data.

Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing.

Provides the system clock.


NOTE

(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

3.3.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications


This section describes the technical specifications of the BBU, which include capacity,
transmission ports, input power specifications, equipment specifications, environment
specifications, and surge protection specifications.
For details about technical specifications of a BBU3900, see section "BBU3900 Technical
Specifications" in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.3.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment


This section describes the slot assignment principles for BBU boards in the following scenarios:
BBU3900 GSM, BBU3900 UMTS, BBU3900 LTE, BBU3900 GSM+UMTS (GU for short),
BBU3900 GSM+LTE (GL for short), BBU3900 UMTS+LTE (UL for short), BBU3900 GU+L
(BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GL+U (BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GU+L
(UCIU+UMPT), BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).

Slots in the BBU3900


Slots in the BBU3900 are the same in different scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-16.
Figure 3-16 Slots in the BBU3900

BBU3900 GSM
Table 3-13 lists the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM.
Table 3-13 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

GTMU

Mandatory

Slots 5 and 6

It must be
configured in
slot 6, with both
slots 5 and 6
occupied.

FAN

Mandatory

Slot 16

It must be
configured in
slot 16.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

USCU

Optional

Slot 0 or 1

It is referentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

UTRP

Optional

Slot 0 or 4

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

UCIU

Optional

Slot 0 or 4

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UBRI

Optional

Slot 2

Figure 3-17 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GSM.


Figure 3-17 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GSM

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

BBU3900 UMTS
Table 3-14 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS.
Table 3-14 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS
Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

WMPT/UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 6 or 7

A single UMPT
or WMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

WBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 5

It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
The slot
assignment
principles for
the WBBP
boards are as
follows:
l The WBBPd
or WBBPf is
preferentiall
y configured
in slot 3 or 2.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence
over the
WBBPd in
slot
assignment.
l If five or
more
WBBPs are
required,
ensure that a
WBBP is

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction
installed in
each of slots
2 and 3. At
least one of
the WBBPs
in slots 2 and
3 is WBBPd
or WBBPf.
l If both slots
2 and 3 are
occupied by
the WBBPa
or WBBPb
boards,
exchange
boards to
ensure that
the WBBPd
or WBBPf is
configured
in slot 3 or 2.
l If the
WBBPf4 is
installed in
the same
BBU as the
WBBPf1,
WBBPf2,
and
WBBPf3,
the WBBPf4
is
preferentiall
y installed in
slots 2 and 3.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

FAN

Mandatory

Slot 16

It must be
configured in
slot 16.

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UTRP

Optional

Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or
6

A single UTRP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.
If several
UTRPs are
configured, the
priority of them
as following:
UTRPc,
UTRP6,
UTRP9,
UTRP2,
UTRP3/UTRP4

USCU

Optional

Slot 1 or 0

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

Figure 3-18 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UMTS.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-18 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UMTS

BBU3900 LTE
Table 3-15 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE.
Table 3-15 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE
Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

LMPT/UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 6 or 7

A single LMPT
or UMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

LBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 5

A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.

FAN

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Mandatory

Slot 16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

It is configured
only in slot 16.

53

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

UTRP

Optional

Slot 4 or 5

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

USCU

Optional

Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5

A single USCU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slot 5 (with both
slots 5 and 4
occupied).
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
USCU is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1, or a
USCU that uses
a dual-satellite
card is
configured in
slot 1, with both
slots 1 and 0
occupied.

Figure 3-19 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 LTE.


Figure 3-19 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 LTE

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

BBU3900 GU
Table 3-16 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU.
Table 3-16 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU
Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

WMPT/UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 7

The WMPT or
UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

GTMU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Mandatory

Slots 5 and 6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

55

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

WBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 4

It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
or 4.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

FAN

Mandatory

Slot 16

It is configured
only in slot 16.

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

UTRP

Optional

Slot 0 or 4

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU

Optional

Slot 0, 1, or 4

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UBRI

Optional

Slot 2

Figure 3-20 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GU.


Figure 3-20 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GU

BBU3900 GL
Table 3-17 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-17 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL
Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

LMPT/UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 7

It is configured
only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

GTMU

Mandatory

Slots 5 and 6

It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

LBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 4

A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
or 4.

FAN

Mandatory

Slot 16

It is configured
only in slot 16.

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

UTRP

Optional

Slot 0 or 4

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

USCU

Optional

Slot 0, 1, or 4

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UBRI

Optional

Slot 2

Figure 3-21 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GL.


Figure 3-21 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GL

BBU3900 UL
Table 3-18 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.
Table 3-18 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

LMPT/UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 6

It is configured
only in slot 6.

WMPT/UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 7

It is configured
only in slot 7.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

LBBP

Mandatory

Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or
5

A single LBBP
is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.

WBBP

Mandatory

Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or
5

A single WBBP
is configured
only in slot 3. If
more WBBPs
are required, the
WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,
or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.
The WBBP,
which provides
a maximum of
six CPRI ports,
is configured in
either slot 2 or
slot 3.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

FAN

Mandatory

Slot 16

It is configured
only in slot 16.

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UTRP

Optional

Slot 4 or 5

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU

Optional

Slot 4 or 5

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

Figure 3-22 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UL.


Figure 3-22 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UL

BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)


BBU3900 GU describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the
GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).
BBU3900 LTE describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting
the LTE mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)


BBU3900 GL describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the
GL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

BBU3900 UMTS describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting
the UMTS mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)


Table 3-19 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT).
Table 3-19 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0
Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

WMPT/UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 7

The WMPT or
UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

GTMU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Mandatory

Slots 5 and 6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

62

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

WBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 3

It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that two WBBPs
are installed in
slots 2 and 3. At
least one of the
two WBBPs is
WBBPd.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

FAN

Mandatory

Slot 16

It is configured
only in slot 16.

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UTRP

Optional

Slot 0 or 1

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.

USCU

Optional

Slot 0 or 1

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.

UBRI

Optional

Slot 2

UCIU

Mandatory

Slot 0, Slot 1,
Slot 4, or slot 5

The UCIU is
installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.

Table 3-20 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the LTE
mode.
Table 3-20 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1
Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 6 or 7

A single UMPT
is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.

LBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 5

A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.

FAN

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Mandatory

Slot 16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

It is configured
only in slot 16.

64

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

UTRP

Optional

Slot 4 or 5

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

USCU

Optional

Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5

A single USCU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slot 5 (with both
slots 5 and 4
occupied).
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
USCU is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1, or a
USCU that uses
a dual-satellite
card is
configured in
slot 1, with both
slots 1 and 0
occupied.

NOTE

The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT)


Table 3-21 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GL
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT).

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-21 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0


Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

LMPT/UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 7

It is configured
only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
The UMPT
must be
configured as
the main control
board in the
UCIU+UMPT
cascading
scenario.

GTMU

Mandatory

Slots 5 and 6

It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

LBBP

Mandatory

Slot 0 to slot 3

A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, or
0.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

FAN

Mandatory

Slot 16

It is configured
only in slot 16.

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UTRP

Optional

Slot 0 or 1

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU

Optional

Slot 0 or 1

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

UBRI

Optional

Slot 2

UCIU

Mandatory

Slot 0, Slot 1,
Slot 4, or slot 5

The UCIU is
installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.

Table 3-22 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the
UMTS mode.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-22 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 6 or 7

A single UMPT
is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

WBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 5

It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

FAN

Mandatory

Slot 16

It must be
configured in
slot 16.

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

UTRP

Optional

Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or
6

A single UTRP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.

USCU

Optional

Slot 1 or 0

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

NOTE

The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT)


Table 3-23 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-23 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0


Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

WMPT/UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 7

The WMPT or
UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.

GTMU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Mandatory

Slots 5 and 6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

71

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

WBBP

Mandatory

Slot 0 to slot 3

It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

FAN

Mandatory

Slot 16

It is configured
only in slot 16.

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

UTRP

Optional

Slot 0 or 1

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU

Optional

Slot 0 or 1

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).

UBRI

Optional

Slot 2

UCIU

Mandatory

Slot 0, Slot 1,
Slot 4, or slot 5

The UCIU is
installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.

Table 3-24 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-24 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL
Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 6

It is configured
only in slot 6.

UMPT

Mandatory

Slot 7

It is configured
only in slot 7.

LBBP

Mandatory

Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or
5

A single LBBP
is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.

WBBP

Mandatory

Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or
5

A single WBBP
is configured
only in slot 3. If
more WBBPs
are required, the
WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,
or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.
The WBBP,
which provides
a maximum of
six CPRI ports,
is configured in
either slot 2 or
slot 3.

FAN

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Mandatory

Slot 16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

It is configured
only in slot 16.

74

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Optional/
Mandatory

Maximum
Number

Slot

Restriction

UPEU

Mandatory

Slot 18 or 19

A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

UTRP

Optional

Slot 4 or 5

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.

USCU

Optional

Slot 4 or 5

It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

NOTE

The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

3.3.5 GTMU
The GSM transmission and timing and management unit (GTMU) is the basic transmission and
control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and
external alarm collection port, monitors the power, controls and manages the entire BTS.

Specifications
The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-25 lists the transmission
specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-25 Transmission specifications of the GTMU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Board

Supported
Mode

Transmissi
on Mode

Number of
ports

Port
Capacity

Full/HalfDuplex

GTMU/
GTMUb

GSM

TDM over
E1/T1

Four
channels

Full-duplex

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Supported
Mode

Transmissi
on Mode

Number of
ports

Port
Capacity

Full/HalfDuplex

Transmissio
n over FE
optical ports

10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmissio
n over FE
electrical
ports

10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Table 3-26 lists the TRX specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-26 TRX specifications of the GTMU
Board

Supported Mode

Transmission
Mode

Maximum Carrier
Number

GTMU

GSM

TDM

72

IP over FE or IP over
E1

36

TDM

126

IP over FE

60

IP over E1

48

GTMUb

GSM

Panel
Figure 3-23 and Figure 3-24 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Figure 3-23 GTMU panel

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-24 GTMUb panel

Functions
The GTMU performs the following functions:
l

Controls, maintains, and operates the base station.

Supports fault management, configuration management, performance management, and


security management.

Monitors the fans and power modules.

Provides and manages the clock of the base station in centralized mode.

Provides the clock output for test.

Provides a port for maintenance on the OM system.

Supports the transmission of four paths of E1 signals and two paths of FE signals.

Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.

Indicators
Table 3-27 describes the indicators on the GTMU.
Table 3-27 Indicators on the GTMU
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Steady off

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for


1s

The board is running properly.

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

Software is being loaded to the


board.

Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the


board must be replaced.

Steady off

There is no fault.

ALM

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Red

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

ACT

Color

Green

Status

Description

On for 1s and off for


1s

An alarm is generated and you


need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

Steady on

The board serves as an active


board.

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

The OML is disconnected.

Besides the preceding three indicators, there are some other indicators on the board, indicating
the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port, and commissioning
port. They are near the corresponding ports and have no silkscreen. Table 3-28 describes the
indicators.
Table 3-28 Indicators for ports
Indicator

Color

Status

Description

LIU0 to LIU3

Green

Steady on

An E1/T1 local alarm


is generated.

On for 1s and off for


1s

An E1/T1 remote
alarm is generated.

Steady off

The link is
functional.

Steady green

The CPRI link is


functioning properly.

Steady red

An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:

CPRI0 to CPRI5

Red or green

l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicator

Color

Status

Description

Blinking red (on for


1s and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is out


of lock because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between dualmode clock
sources.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over CPRI
ports.

Steady off

l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.

ETH

FE0

FE1 (on the


GTMUb)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Green (LINK
indicator on the left
side)

Steady on

The connection is set


up successfully.

Steady off

No connection is set
up.

Orange (ACT
indicator on the right
side)

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received.

Green (LINK
indicator on the left
side)

Steady on

The connection is set


up successfully.

Steady off

No connection is set
up.

Orange (ACT
indicator on the right
side)

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady on

The connection is set


up successfully.

Green (LINK
indicator on the left
side)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicator

Color

Green (ACT
indicator on the right
side)

Status

Description

Steady off

No connection is set
up.

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received.

M_S (on the


GTMUb)

This is the indicator


for the reserved port.

EXT (on the


GTMUb)

This is the indicator


for the reserved port.

Ports
Table 3-29 describes the ports on the GTMU.
Table 3-29 Ports on the GTMU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5

SFP female
connector

Data transmission port interconnected to the RF


module. It supports the input and output of optical
and electrical transmission signals.

EXT (on the


GTMUb)

SFP female
connector

Reserved

ETH(1)

RJ45 connector

Local maintenance and commissioning port

FE0

RJ45 connector

Connected to the routers in the equipment room


through FE cables to transmit network
information

FE1

DLC connector

Connected to the routers in the equipment room


through fiber optic cables to transmit network
information

TST(2)

USB connector

Port for clock signal outputs

USB(3)

USB connector

Used for automatic software upgrade through the


USB flash drive

E1/T1

DB26 female
connector

Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs between


the GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs

RST

Used for resetting the GTMU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet


NOTE

(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and
the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.
(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base
station configuration.
(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-30 Specifications of CPRI ports on the GTMU and GTMUb
Board

Quantity of CPRI
Ports

CPRI Port Rate


(Gbit/s)

Topology Type

GTMU

1.25

Star, chain, and ring


topologies

GTMUb

1.25/2.5

Star, chain, and ring


topologies

DIP Switch
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and
S2 need to be set jointly. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:
l

S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 3-31 provides details on the DIP switch.

S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission cables. Table 3-32 provides
details on the DIP switch.

S3 is reserved.

S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 3-33 provides details on the DIP switch.

S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 3-34 provides details
on the DIP switch.

Table 3-31 Description on S1


DIP
Switch

DIP Setting

Description

S1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

The E1 resistance is set to


75 ohm.

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

The E1 resistance is set to


120 ohm.

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

The T1 resistance is set to


100 ohm.

Others

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Unavailable

81

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet


NOTE

Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the factory-delivered configuration, without any manual setting on site.
The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.

Table 3-32 Description on S2


DIP
Switch

DIP Setting

Description

S2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

All the bits are set to


OFF by default in all
modes.

ON

ON

ON

ON

When error codes are


received over the four
E1 RX links in 75 ohm,
all the bits of S2 must
be set to ON to rectify
the faults on the E1
links.

Others

Unavailable

Table 3-33 Description on S4


DIP
Switch

DIP Setting

Description

S4

ON

ON

ON

ON

Supporting E1 bypass

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Not supporting E1
bypass

Others

Unavailable

Table 3-34 Description on S5

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

DIP
Switch

DIP Setting

Description

S5

ON

ON

ON

ON

Not supporting E1
bypass

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

Supporting E1 bypass
of level-1 cascaded
base stations

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

DIP
Switch

DIP Setting

Description

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Supporting E1 bypass
of level-2 cascaded
base stations

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

Supporting E1 bypass
of level-3 cascaded
BTSs

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Supporting E1 bypass
of level-4 cascaded
BTSs

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

Supporting E1 bypass
of level-5 cascaded
BTSs

3.3.6 WMPT
The WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) processes signals for the
BBU3900 and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.

Specifications
Table 3-35 lists the WMPT specifications.
Table 3-35 WMPT specifications
Board

Applicable
Mode

Transmissi
on Mode

Number of
ports

Port
Capacity

Full/HalfDuplex

WMPT

UMTS

ATM over
E1/T1 or IP
over E1/T1

Four
channels

Full-duplex

Transmissio
n over FE
optical ports

10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmissio
n over FE
electrical
ports

10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s

Full-duplex

NOTE

For combined signaling specifications of the WMPT, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Panel
Figure 3-25 shows the panel of the WMPT.
Figure 3-25 WMPT panel

Functions
The WMPT performs the following functions:
l

Performs functions such as configuration management, equipment management,


performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active and standby switchover, and
provides OM channel to communicate with the LMT or M2000.

Provides a reference clock for the system.

Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.

Provides USB ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration data
can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.

Provides a 4-channel E1/T1 port over ATM or IP.

Provides an FE electrical port and an FE optical port over IP.

Indicators
Table 3-36 describes the indicators on the WMPT panel.
Table 3-36 Indicators on the WMPT panel

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power
supply, but the board
is faulty.

Steady off

There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.

On for 1s and off for


1s

The board is
functioning properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

l Data or software
is being loaded to
the board.
l The board is not
started.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

Steady on

An alarm is
generated, and the
board must be
replaced.

Steady off

The board is running


properly.

On for 1s and off for


1s

An alarm is
generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.

Steady on

The board serves as


an active board.

Steady off

l The board does


not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

The operation and


maintenance link
(OML) is
disconnected.

On for 1s and off for


1s

The board is being


tested, such as an
RRU Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) test through
a USB(2)(3) flash
drive.

In addition to the preceding three indicators, there are six indicators on the board panel, which
indicate the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Ethernet port. The six indicators do not have silkscreen on the WMPT panel, whereas they are
at both sides of the corresponding ports, as shown in Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-26 Port status indicators on the WMPT panel

Table 3-37 describes the port status indicators on the WMPT panel.
Table 3-37 Port status indicators
Indicator

Color

Status

Description

FE1 optical port


status indicators

Green (LINK on the


left side)

Steady on

The connection is set


up successfully.

Steady off

No connection is set
up.

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady on

The connection is set


up successfully.

Steady off

No connection is set
up.

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady on

The connection is set


up successfully.

Steady off

No connection is set
up.

Orange (ACT on the


right side)

FE0 electrical port


status indicators

Green (LINK on the


left side)

Orange (ACT on the


right side)

ETH port indicators

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Green (LINK on the


left side)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicator

Color

Status

Description

Orange (ACT on the


right side)

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received.

Ports
Table 3-38 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.
Table 3-38 Ports on the WMPT panel
Silkscreen

Connector

Description

E1/T1 port

DB26 female connector

E1/T1 port

FE0

RJ45 connector

FE electrical port

FE1

SFP female connector

FE optical port

GPS

SMA connector

Reserved

ETH(1)

RJ45 connector

Local maintenance and


commissioning port

TST(2)

USB connector

Port for clock signal outputs

USB(3)

USB connector

USB loading port

RST

Used for resetting the WMPT

NOTE

(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and
the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.
(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base
station configuration.
(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

DIP Switch
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 and SW2. SW1 is used to set the work mode of the E1/
T1 signal cable, and SW2 is used to set the resistance of the four E1/T1 signal cables in different
modes. Figure 3-27 shows the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-27 DIP switch settings of the WMPT

Table 3-39 and Table 3-40 list the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.
Table 3-39 Settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the WMPT
DIP
Switch
SW1

DIP Status

Description

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

T1

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

The E1
resistance is
set to 120
ohm.

ON

ON

ON

ON

The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.

Others

Unavailable

Table 3-40 Settings of the DIP switch SW2 on the WMPT


DIP
Switch

DIP Status

Description

SW2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Balanced

ON

ON

ON

ON

Imbalanced

Others
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Unavailable
88

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

3.3.7 UMPT
The universal main processing and transmission unit (UMPT) processes signals and manages
resources on other boards in the BBU3900.
NOTE

UMPTb1 is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC370 and later versions.

Specifications of the UMPT


The UMPT is classified into four types: UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6. Table
3-41 lists the specifications of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6.
Table 3-41 Specifications of the UMPT
Board

Applicable
Mode

Transmissi
on Mode

Number of
ports

Port
Capacity

Full/HalfDuplex

UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

UMTS

ATM over
E1/T1 or IP
over E1/T1

Four
channels

Transmissio
n over FE/
GE electrical
ports

10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
or 1000
Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmissio
n over FE/
GE optical
ports

100 Mbit/s or
1000 Mbit/s

Full- or halfduplex

IP over E1/
T1

Four
channels

Transmissio
n over FE/
GE electrical
ports

10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
or 1000
Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmissio
n over FE/
GE optical
ports

100 Mbit/s or
1000 Mbit/s

Full- or halfduplex

UMPTa2/
UMPTa6

LTE

The following table describes the signaling specifications of the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working
in LTE mode.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-42 Signaling specifications


Board

Signaling Specifications (BHCA)

UMPTa2/UMPTa6

60000

The following table describes the data radio bearer (DRB) specifications and maximum number
of users supported by the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working in LTE mode.
Table 3-43 Data radio bearer specifications
Board

Maximum Number of Users

UMPTa2/UMPTa6

10800

The maximum of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the UMPTa2/UMPTa6 working in
LTE mode is three times the maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode.
NOTE

For signaling specifications of the eNodeB and NodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of DRBs and the maximum number
of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by the eNodeB, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description.

Panel
Figure 3-28, Figure 3-30, Figure 3-29 and Figure 3-31 show the panels of the UMPT boards.
Figure 3-28 UMPTa1 Panel

Figure 3-29 UMPTb1 Panel

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-30 UMPTa2 Panel

Figure 3-31 UMPTa6 Panel

NOTE

In the lower left of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, there are silkscreens UMPTa1,
UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, respectively, indicating their board types.

Functions
The UMPT performs the following functions:
l

Performs configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,


signaling message processing, and active/standby switchover.

Controls all boards in the system.

Provides the reference clock for the entire system.

Implements transmission and provides absolute time and 1 pulse per second (PPS) reference
clock source while being equipped with a single satellite card.

Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission in compliance
with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP), and Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) during the initial configuration.

Ports
Table 3-44 describes the ports on the UMPT.
Table 3-44 Ports on the UMPT

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

FE/GE1

SFP female
connector

A 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernet


optical port is used for transmitting service data
and signaling messages.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

FE/GE0

RJ45 connector

A 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive


Ethernet electrical port is used for transmitting
service data and signaling messages.

USB(1)

USB connector

The USB port with the USB silkscreen is used for


the software upgrade of a base station using a USB
flash driver. This port also functions as a
commissioning Ethernet port(2).
The USB port with the CLK silkscreen functions
as follows:
l Receives TOD signals.
l Port for clock signal outputs.

E1/T1

DB26 female
connector

The port is used for four E1/T1 signal inputs and


outputs between the UMPT and universal E1/T1
lightning protection unit (UELP) or between base
station controllers.

GPS

SMA connector

The GPS port on the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, or


UMPTa2 is reserved.
The GPS port on the UMPTa6 is used for
transmitting radio frequency (RF) signals
received from the antenna to the satellite card.

CI

SFP female
connector

The port is used for BBU interconnection.

RST

The port is used to reset the board.

NOTE

(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.


(2) When the USB port functions as a commissioning Ethernet port, ensure that an OM port has been opened
and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port before
accessing the base station through the USB port.

Indicators
Table 3-45 describes the indicators on the UMPT.
Table 3-45 Indicators on the UMPT

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power
supply, but the board
is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

Steady off

There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.

On for 1s and off for


1s

The board is
functioning properly.

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

l The board is
being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

Steady on

An alarm is
generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.

Steady off

The board is running


properly.

On for 1s and off for


1s

An alarm is
generated, and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.

Steady on

The board serves as


an active board.

Steady off

l The board does


not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The operation and


maintenance link
(OML) is
disconnected.

93

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

On for 1s and off for


1s

The board is being


tested, such as an
RRU Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) test through
a USB(1) flash drive.
NOTE
Of UMPT boards,
only the UMPTa1 has
this status.

In every 4s, the


indicator is on for
0.125s and off for
0.125s (eight times)
in the first 2s and then
off for 2s.

l All cells
corresponding to
the subrack that
houses this board
are not activated.
l The S1 link is
faulty.
NOTE
Of UMPT boards,
only the UMPTa2 and
UMPTa6 have this
status.

Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators indicate the connection status of
the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1 port. The
indicators on the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1
port, which have no silkscreen on the boards, are near the corresponding port, as shown in Figure
3-32.
Figure 3-32 Indicators for ports

Table 3-46 describes the indicators.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-46 Indicators for ports


Indicator/
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Definition

LINK (silkscreen for


the optical port)

Green

Steady on

The connection is
normal.

Steady off

The connection is
abnormal.

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted.

Steady on

The connection is
normal.

Steady off

The connection is
abnormal.

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted.

Steady green

The interconnection
link is normal.

Steady red

An optical module
fails to receive
signals because of
one of the following
reasons:

ACT (silkscreen for


the optical port)

LINK (silkscreen for


the electrical port)

ACT (silkscreen for


the electrical port)

CI

Orange

Green

Orange

Red or green

l The optical
module is faulty.
l The optical cable
is broken.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicator/
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Definition

Blinking red (on for


0.125s and off for
0.125s)

Cables are connected


in one of following
incorrect manners:
l In the UCIU
+UMPT scenario,
the S0 port on the
UCIU is
connected to the
CI port on the
UMPT.
Indicators for the
S0 and CI ports
are blinking.
l The ports are
connected in ring
topology.
Indicators for all
incorrectly
connected ports
are blinking.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Steady off

The optical module


cannot be detected.

R0, R1, R2

Red or green

Reserved

L01

Red or green

Steady off

E1/T1 link 0 and 1 is


not set up, or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Steady green

E1/T1 links 0 and 1


are working
properly.

Blinking green (on


for 1s and off for 1s)

E1/T1 link 0 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 1 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Blinking green (on


for 0.125s and off for
0.125s)

E1/T1 link 1 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 0 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Steady red

Alarms are generated


on E1/T1 links 0 and
1.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicator/
Silkscreen

L23

Color

Red or green

Status

Definition

Blinking red (on for


1s and off for 1s)

An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 0.

Blinking red (on for


0.125s and off for
0.125s)

An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 1.

Steady off

E1/T1 link 2 and 3 is


not set up, or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Steady green

E1/T1 links 2 and 3


are working
properly.

Blinking green (on


for 1s and off for 1s)

E1/T1 link 2 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 3 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Blinking green (on


for 0.125s and off for
0.125s)

E1/T1 link 3 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 2 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.

Steady red

Alarms are generated


on E1/T1 links 2 and
3.

Blinking red (on for


1s and off for 1s)

An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 2.

Blinking red (on for


0.125s and off for
0.125s)

An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 3.

DIP Switch
Two DIP switches on the UMPT are labeled SW1 and SW2. Figure 3-33 shows the positions
of DIP switches on the UMPT.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-33 Positions of DIP switches on the UMPT

Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions:
l

SW1 is used to select the E1/T1 mode. Table 3-47 describes the DIP switch.

SW2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission. Table 3-48 describes the
DIP switch.

Table 3-47 DIP switch SW1


DIP
Switch

DIP Status

Description

SW1

ON

ON

Reserved

Reserved

OFF

ON

The E1 resistance is set to


120 ohms.

ON

OFF

The T1 resistance is set to


100 ohms.

The E1 resistance is set to


75 ohms.

Table 3-48 DIP switch SW2


DIP
Switch

DIP Status

Description

SW2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Balanced

ON

ON

ON

ON

Unbalanced

3.3.8 LMPT
The LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system in
terms of OM and signaling processing and provides system clock for the BBU3900.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Specifications
Table 3-49 lists the specifications of the LMPT.
Table 3-49 Specifications of the LMPT
Board

Mode

Transmissi
on Mode

Number of
ports

Port
Capacity

Full/HalfDuplex

LMPT

LTE

Transmissio
n over FE/
GE optical
ports

10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
and 1000
Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmissio
n over FE/
GE electrical
ports

10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
and 1000
Mbit/s

Full-duplex

The following table describes the signaling specifications of the LMPT.


Table 3-50 Signaling specifications of the LMPT
Board

Signaling Specifications (BHCA)

LMPT

40000

The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by
the LMPT.
Table 3-51 Maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode
Board

Maximum Number of UEs in RRC


Connected Mode

LMPT

5400

The maximum number of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by an LMPT is three times the
maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode.
NOTE

For signaling specifications of the eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series Base
Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of DRBs and the maximum number of UEs in
RRC connected mode supported by the eNodeB, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base
Station Technical Description.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Panel
Figure 3-34 shows the LMPT.
Figure 3-34 LMPT

Functions
The LMPT performs the following functions:
l

Enables configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,


signaling processing, and radio source management

Controls all boards in the system

Provides the system clock

Enables signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW

Indicators
There are three indicators on the LMPT panel. Table 3-52 describes the indicators on the LMPT
panel and their status.
Table 3-52 Indicators on the LMPT panel
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

Steady off

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

On for 1s and off


for 1s

The board is functioning


properly.

On for 0.125s and l Software or data is being


off for 0.125s
loaded to the board.
l The board is not started.
ALM

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Red

Steady on

An alarm is generated, and


the board needs to be
replaced.

Steady off

The board is running


properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

ACT

Green

Status

Description

On for 1s and off


for 1s

An alarm is generated and


you need to locate the fault
before deciding whether to
replace the board.

Steady on

The board serves as an


active board.

Steady off

l The board does not


serve as an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not
providing any services.

On for 0.125s and The OML is disconnected.


off for 0.125s
In every 4s, the
indicator is on for
0.125s and off for
0.125s (eight
times) in the first
2s and then off for
2s.

l All cells corresponding


to the subrack that
houses this board are not
activated.
l The S1 link is faulty.

Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators used for indicating the connection
status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning Ethernet port have no
silkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 3-53 describes the indicators.
Table 3-53 Indicators
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

SFP0 and SFP1

Green (LINK)

Steady on

The connection is set


up successfully.

Steady off

No connection is set
up.

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received.

Orange (ACT)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

ETH

Orange (ACT)

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady on

The connection is set


up successfully.

Steady off

No connection is set
up.

Steady on

The connection is set


up successfully.

Steady off

No connection is set
up.

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received.

Green (LINK)

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1

Green (LINK)

Orange (ACT)

Ports
Table 3-54 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.
Table 3-54 Ports on the panel of the LMPT

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity

Description

SFP0 and SFP1

SFP female
connector

FE/GE optical port


connecting to the
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment

ETH(1)

RJ45 connector

Local maintenance and


commissioning port

TST(2)

USB connector

Port for clock signal


outputs

USB(3)

USB connector

Software loading

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity

Description

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1

RJ45 connector

FE/GE electrical port


connecting to the
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment

GPS

SMA connector

GPS port

RST

Used for resetting the


LMPT

NOTE

(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and
the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.
(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base
station configuration.
(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
NOTE

SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used
simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they cannot be used
simultaneously.

3.3.9 WBBP
The WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
NOTE

WBBPf is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC320 and later versions.

Specifications
The WBBP falls into four types, as listed in Table 3-55.
NOTE

The WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.

Table 3-55 WBBP specifications

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Board

Number
of Cells

Number
of UL
CEs

Number
of DL
CEs

Number
of
HSDPA
Codesa

Number
of
HSDPA
UEs

Number
of
HSUPA
UEs

WBBPa

128

256

3x15

96

60

WBBPb1

64

64

3x15

64

64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Number
of Cells

Number
of UL
CEs

Number
of DL
CEs

Number
of
HSDPA
Codesa

Number
of
HSDPA
UEs

Number
of
HSUPA
UEs

WBBPb2

128

128

3x15

128

96

WBBPb3

256

256

6x15

144

96

WBBPb4

384

384

6x15

144

96

WBBPd1

64

64

6x15

128

96

192

192

256

256

6x15

144

144

384

384

WBBPd2

WBBPd3

256

256

6x15

144

96

WBBPf1

64

128

6x15

144

144

192

256

WBBPf2

256

384

6x15

192

192

WBBPf3

256

384

6x15

256

256

384

512

512

768

6x15

384

384

WBBPf4

a: The number of HSDPA codes supported by a WBBPd1 is 6x15, where "6" is the number
of cells and "15" is the number of codes supported by each cell.

NOTE

For combined signaling specifications of the WBBP, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description.

Panel
The WBBP has four types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-35, Figure 3-36, Figure 3-37, and
Figure 3-38.
Figure 3-35 Panel of the WBBPa

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-36 Panel of the WBBPb

Figure 3-37 Panel of the WBBPd

Figure 3-38 Panel of the WBBPf

NOTE

l The WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 have silkscreens WBBPb1, WBBPb2,
WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel,
respectively.
l The WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3 have silkscreens WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3
indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
l The WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and WBBPf4 have silkscreens WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and
WBBPf4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

Functions
The WBBP performs the following functions:
l

Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules, and supports CPRI ports in 1
+1 backup mode.

Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.

The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.

When the WBBPd is installed in slot 2 or 3 and is connected to an RF module, the WBBPd
supports the IC of uplink data.

The WBBPf installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the baseband interconnection between
BBUs.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Indicators
There are three indicators on the panel of the WBBP. Table 3-56 describes the indicators on the
WBBP and their status.
Table 3-56 Indicators on the panel of the WBBP and their status
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Steady off

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for 1s

The board is functioning


properly.

On for 0.125s and off for


0.125s

l Software or data is being


loaded to the board.
l The board is not started.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the


board must be replaced.

Steady off

The board is running properly.

On for 1s and off for 1s

An alarm is generated and you


need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

Steady on

The board serves as an active


board.

Steady off

l The board does not serve as


an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not providing
any services.

On for 1s and off for 1s

The power supply for the board


is insufficient.
NOTE
Of all types of WBBP boards, only
the WBBPf has this status.

The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three indicators indicating the status of Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) links, and the indicators are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd or WBBPf
provides six indicators indicating the status of SFP links, and the indicators are above the SFP
ports.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-57 describes the indicators.


Table 3-57 CPRI port status indicators
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

CPRIx

Red or green

Steady green

The CPRI link is


functioning properly.

Steady red

An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for


0.125s and off for
0.125s)

The RF module
connected to the CPRI
link has a hardware
fault.

Blinking red (on for


1s and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is out


of lock because of
following reasons:
l There is no mutual
lock between dualmode clock
sources.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over CPRI
ports.
l VSWR alarms are
generated on the
RF module
connected to the
CPRI link when
the USB(1) flash
drive is used for
VSWR test.

Steady off

l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet


NOTE

(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.

The WBBPf provides an indicator indicating the status of the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable
(QSFP) link, and the indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-58 describes this indicator.
Table 3-58 QSFP port status indicators
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

HEI

Red or green

Steady green

The inter-BBU
transmission link is
functional.

Steady red

An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for


1s and off for 1s)

The interconnection
link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over QSFP
ports.

Steady off

The optical module


cannot be detected.

Ports
Table 3-59 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-59 Ports on the WBBPa and WBBPb panels


Silkscreen

Connector

Description

CPRIx

SFP female connector

Data transmission port


interconnected to the RF
module. It supports the input
and output of optical and
electrical transmission
signals.

Table 3-60 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.
Table 3-60 Ports on the WBBPd panel
Silkscreen

Connector

Description

CPRI0, CPRI1,
CPRI2, CPRI3/
EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1,
CPRI5/EIH2

SFP female connector

Data transmission port


interconnected to the RF module.
It supports the input and output of
optical and electrical
transmission signals.

The WBBPf provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port, as listed in Table 3-61.
Table 3-61 Ports on the WBBPf panel
Silkscreen

Connector

Description

CPRIx

SFP female connector

Data transmission port


interconnected to the RF
module. It supports the input
and output of optical and
electrical transmission
signals.

HEI

QSFP connector

Port interconnected to other


baseband boards to share the
baseband resources.

3.3.10 LBBP
The LTE baseband processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

Specifications
The following table lists the signaling specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-62 Signaling specifications of the LBBP


Board

Signaling Specifications (BHCA)

LBBPc

40000

LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPd3

50000

Table 3-63 Signaling specifications of the LBBP


Board

Signaling Specifications (BHCA)

LBBPc

60000

LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPd3

80000

The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by
the LBBP board in LTE FDD scenarios.
Table 3-64 Maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode
Board

Cell Bandwidth

Maximum Number of UEs in


RRC Connected Mode

LBBPc

1.4 MHz

1008

3 MHz

1800

5 MHz

1800

10 MHz

1800

15 MHz

1800 (in 2R mode) or 1200 (in 4R


mode)

20 MHz

1800 (in 2R mode) or 1200 (in 4R


mode)

1.4 MHz

300

3 MHz

1080

5 MHz

1800

10 MHz

3600

15 MHz

3600

20 MHz

3600

1.4 MHz

600

3 MHz

2160

LBBPd1 or LBBPd2

LBBPd3

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Cell Bandwidth

Maximum Number of UEs in


RRC Connected Mode

5 MHz

3600

10 MHz

3600

15 MHz

3600

20 MHz

3600

The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode supported by
the LBBP board in LTE TDD scenarios.
Table 3-65 Maximum Number of UEs in RRC connected mode
Board

Cell Bandwidth

Maximum Number of
UEs in RRC Connected
Mode

LBBPc

5MHz

1800

10MHz

1800

20MHz

1800(2R)/1200(4R)

10MHz

3600

20MHz

3600

5 MHz

1800

10 MHz

3600

15 MHz

3600

20 MHz

3600

10 MHz

3600

20 MHz

3600

LBBPd1

LBBPd2

LBBPd4

Table 3-66 Maximum Number of UEs in RRC connected mode

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Board

Cell Bandwidth

Maximum Number of
UEs in RRC Connected
Mode

LBBPd1

10MHz

3600

20MHz

3600

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Board

Cell Bandwidth

Maximum Number of
UEs in RRC Connected
Mode

LBBPd3

10 MHz

3600

20 MHz

3600

The maximum number of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by an LBBP is three times the
maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode.
NOTE

For the overall signaling specifications of an eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description. For the data radio bearer (DRB) and maximum number of UEs in
RRC_CONNECTED mode, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical
Description.

The following table lists the maximum throughput of the LBBP.


Table 3-67 Maximum throughput of the LBBP
Board

Maximum Throughput

LBBPc

l Downlink: 300 Mbit/s


l Uplink: 100 Mbit/s

LBBPd1

l Downlink: 450 Mbit/s


l Uplink: 225 Mbit/s

LBBPd2

l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s


l Uplink: 225 Mbit/s

LBBPd3

LTE FDD:
l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s
l Uplink: 300 Mbit/s
LTE TDD:
l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s
l Uplink: 225 Mbit/s

LBBPd4

l Downlink: 600 Mbit/s


l Uplink: 225 Mbit/s

NOTE

The maximum throughput listed in the preceding table is the hardware capacities supported by the LBBPc
and LBBPd boards in LTE TDD scenarios. The actual uplink and downlink peak throughput depends on
uplink-downlink subframe configurations.

The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-68 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios


Board

Number of
Cell

Cell Bandwidth

Antenna Configuration

LBBPc

1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10


MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz

3x20 MHz 1T1R


3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x10 MHz 4T4R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
1x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd1

1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10


MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz

3x20 MHz 1T1R


3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x20 MHz 2T2R

LBBPd2

1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10


MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz

3x20 MHz 1T1R


3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
3x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd3

1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, and


10 MHz

6x10M 1T1R
6x10M 1T2R
6x10M 2T2R

The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios.
Table 3-69 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios
Board

Number of
Cells

Cell Bandwidth

Antenna Configuration

LBBPc

5 MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz

1x20 MHz (4T4R)


3x10M 2T2R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
3x10 MHz 4T4R

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

LBBPd2

5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 3x20 MHz 2T2R


20 MHz
3x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd4

10 MHz or 20 MHz

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3x20 MHz (8T8R)

113

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-70 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios


Board

Number of Cells

Cell Bandwidth

Antenna
Configuration

LBBPd1

10M/20M

3x20M 2T2R

LBBPd3

10 MHz or 20 MHz

6x20 MHz 2T2R


3x20 MHz 8T8R

NOTE

l "Antenna Configuration" lists the maximum configurations supported by various types of a baseband
processing board. For example, the LBBPc supports the maximum configuration of 3x10 MHz 4T4R,
and therefore supports any of the following configurations: 3x1.4 MHz 4T4R, 3x3 MHz 4T4R, and
3x5 MHz 4T4R.
l As long as the maximum antenna configuration is not exceeded, different cells support different antenna
configurations. For example, if an LBBPd2 supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the
three cells connected to the LBBPc can use the following antenna configurations: 2T2R, 2T2R, and
1T1R.
l Boards with the same antenna configuration support combinations of different bandwidth as long as
the total bandwidth does not exceed the maximum bandwidth supported by the board. For example, if
an LBBPc supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the three cells connected to the LBBPc
can use any of the following antenna configurations: 1.4 MHz 2T2R, 3 MHz 2T2R, 5 MHz 2T2R, 10
MHz 2T2R, 15 MHz 2T2R, and 20 MHz 2T2R.
l The LBBP supports CPRI convergence when the site is configured with any of the following RF
modules: RRU3221, RRU3240, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, LRFUe, MRFUd,
RRU3229, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3642, RRU3832, RRU3838, and RRU3268. The CPRI
convergence of the LBBP must comply with the following principles:
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only between two
LBBPc boards, and one LBBPc board must be configured in slot 2 or 3.
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only from multiple
LBBPc boards to one LBBPd board, and only the CPRI ports on the LBBPd in slot 2 or 3 can
connect to RF units.
l in LTE TDD scenarios, the LBBPc cannot serve as a converging board and only can be a converged
board.

Panel
The LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-39 and Figure 3-40.
Figure 3-39 LBBPc panel

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-40 LBBPd panel

NOTE

The LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, and LBBPd4 have silkscreens LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, and
LBBPd4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

Functions
The LBBP performs the following functions:
l

Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.

Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules.

Indicators
On the LBBP panel, there are three indicators, as described in Table 3-71.
Table 3-71 Indicators on the LBBP panel
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Steady off

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for 1s

The board is functioning


properly.

On for 0.125s and off for


0.125s

l The board is being loaded or


configured.
l The board is not started.

ALM

ACT

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Red

Green

Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the


board must be replaced.

Steady off

The board is running properly.

On for 1s and off for 1s

An alarm is generated, and you


need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

Steady on

The board serves as an active


board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

Steady off

l The board does not serve as


an active board.
l The board is not activated.
l The board does not provide
any services.

On for 1s and off for 1s

The power supply for the board


is insufficient.
NOTE
Of all types of LBBP boards, only
the LBBPd has this status.

As listed in Table 3-72, the LBBP provides six indicators indicating the Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) link status. The indicators are positioned above the SFP ports.
Table 3-72 SFP link status indicators
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

CPRIx

Red or green

Steady green

The CPRI link is


functioning properly.

Steady red

An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Blinking red (on for


0.125s and off for
0.125s)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The RF module
connected to the CPRI
link has a hardware
fault.

116

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

Blinking red (on for


1s and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is out


of lock because of the
following reasons:
l There is no mutual
lock between dualmode clock
sources.
l The data rates of
the CPRI ports do
not match each
other.

Steady off

l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.

The LBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable (QSFP)
link status. The indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-73 describes the indicator.
Table 3-73 QSFP link status indicator
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

HEI

Red or green

Steady green

The inter-BBU
transmission link is
functional.

Steady red

An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

Blinking red (on for


1s and off for 1s)

The interconnection
link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l The data rates of
the QSFP ports do
not match each
other.

Steady off

The optical module


cannot be detected.

Ports
Table 3-74 describes the six CPRI ports on the LBBP panel.
Table 3-74 LBBP ports
Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity

Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5

SFP female
connector

Connected to the RF
modules for
transmitting service
data, clock signals,
and synchronization
information.

Table 3-75 describes the QSFP port on the LBBPd panel.


Table 3-75 QSFP port on the LBBPd panel
Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity

Description

HEI

QSFP connector

Reserved

3.3.11 FAN
The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of the
fan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Panel
The FAN units fall into two types: FAN and FANc, as shown in Figure 3-41 and Figure 3-42.
Figure 3-41 FAN

Figure 3-42 FANc

NOTE

There is a FANc silkscreen on the FANc while the FAN has no such silkscreen.

Functions
The FAN unit performs the following functions:
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Controls the fan speed.

Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control
processing unit.

Monitors the temperature at the air intake vent.

Dissipates heat.

The FANc provides a read-write electronic label.

Indicator
There is only one indicator on the panel of the FAN unit, which indicates the operating status
of the fans. Table 3-76 describes the indicator.
Table 3-76 Indicator on the panel of the FAN unit
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

STATE

Red or green

Blinking green (on


for 0.125s and off for
0.125s)

The module is not


registered, and no
alarm is reported.

Blinking green (on


for 1s and off for 1s)

The module is
working.

Blinking red (on for


1s and off for 1s)

The module is
reporting alarms.

Steady off

There is no power
supply.

3.3.12 UPEU
The universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48 V
DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.

Panel
The UPEU is classified into four types: universal power and environment interface unit type a
(UPEUa), universal power and environment interface unit type b (UPEUb), universal power and
environment interface unit type c (UPEUc), and universal power and environment interface unit
type d (UPEUd). The UPEUa, UPEUc, and UPEUd convert -48 V DC power into +12 V DC
power, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure 3-43, Figure
3-44, Figure 3-45, and Figure 3-46 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, UPEUc, and
UPEUd, respectively.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-43 UPEUa panel

(1) BBU power switch

(2) 7W2 connector

Figure 3-44 UPEUb panel

(1) BBU power switch

(2) 7W2 connector

Figure 3-45 UPEUc panel

(1) BBU power switch

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

(2) 3V3 connector

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-46 UPEUd panel

(1) BBU power switch

(2) 3V3 connector

NOTE

The UPEUc and UPEUd have silkscreens "UPEUc" and "UPEUd" indicating their board types on them,
respectively, whereas the UPEUa and UPEUb do not have such silkscreens indicating their board types.
The UPEUa and UPEUb, however, can be distinguished by the silkscreens "-48 V" and "+24 V" on them.

Functions
The UPEU performs the following functions:
l

Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the operating
voltage of the boards.

Provides two ports with each receiving one RS485 signal and another two ports with each
receiving four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or Open
Collector (OC) signals.

Table 3-77 describes the specifications.


Table 3-77 Specifications

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Board

Output Power

Backup Mode

UPEUa

The output power of a


UPEUa is 300 W.

1+1 backup

UPEUc

The output power of a


UPEUc is 360 W, and the
output power of two UPEUc
boards is 650 W.

1+1 backup

UPEUd

The output power of a


UPEUd is 650 W.

1+1 backup

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet


NOTE

A BBU cannot house two UPEUs of different types. When the power required by the BBU exceeds the
power specification of the BBU:
l If the BBU has been configured with one or two UPEUa boards, replace the boards with two UPEUc
boards.
l If the BBU has been configured with one UPEUc board, add a second UPEUc board.

Indicator
The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 3-78
describes the indicator.
Table 3-78 Indicator on the UPEU panel
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

The board is
functional.

Steady off

There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.

Port
The UPEU provides two RS485 signal ports, each receiving one RS485 signal, and two Boolean
signal ports, each receiving four Boolean signals. Figure 3-47 shows the slots in the BBU.
Figure 3-47 Slots in the BBU

Table 3-79 describes the ports on the UPEU panel.


Table 3-79 Description on the ports

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Slot

Silkscree
n

Connecto
r

Quantity

Description

Slot 19

+24 V or
-48 V

3V3 or
7W2
connector

Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Slot

Slot 18

Silkscree
n

Connecto
r

Quantity

Description

EXTALM0

RJ45
connector

Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

EXTALM1

RJ45
connector

Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7

MON0

RJ45
connector

Port for RS485 input 0

MON1

RJ45
connector

Port for RS485 input 1

+24 V or
-48 V

3V3 or
7W2
connector

Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

EXTALM0

RJ45
connector

Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

EXTALM1

RJ45
connector

Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7

MON0

RJ45
connector

Port for RS485 input 0

MON1

RJ45
connector

Port for RS485 input 1

3.3.13 UEIU
The universal environment interface unit (UEIU) of the BBU3900 transmits monitoring signals
and alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.

Panel
Figure 3-48 shows the panel of the UEIU.
Figure 3-48 Panel of the UEIU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Functions
The UEIU performs the following functions:
l

Provides two ports with each receiving one path of RS485 signal.

Provides two ports with each receiving four paths of Boolean signals. The Boolean signals
can only be dry contact or OC signals.

Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control
board.

Port
The UEIU is configured in slot 18 and provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting one
path of RS485 signals, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four paths of Boolean
signals.
Table 3-80 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.
Table 3-80 Ports on the panel of the UEIU
Slot

Silkscre
en

Connect
or

Quanti
ty

Description

Slot 18

EXTALM0

RJ45
connector

Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

EXTALM1

RJ45
connector

Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7

MON0

RJ45
connector

Port for RS485 input 0

MON1

RJ45
connector

Port for RS485 input 1

3.3.14 UTRP
The universal transmission processing unit (UTRP) is an extended transmission board in the
BBU3900 and provides ports connecting to transmission equipment.

Specifications
Table 3-81 describes the specifications of the UTRP.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-81 Specifications of the UTRP


Board

Subboard/
Board
Type

Supporte
d Mode

Transmis
sion
Mode

Number
of ports

Port
Capacity

Full/
HalfDuplex

UTRP2

UEOC

UMTS

Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
optical
ports

10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/
s, and
1000
Mbit/s

Fullduplex

UTRP3

UAEC

UMTS

ATM over
E1/T1

Eight
channels

Fullduplex

UTRP4

UIEC

UMTS

IP over E1/
T1

Eight
channels

Fullduplex

UTRPb4

Without a
sub-board

GSM

TDM over
E1/T1

Eight
channels

Fullduplex

UTRP6

UUAS

UMTS

STM-1/
OC-3

One
channel

Fullduplex

UTRP9

UQEC

UMTS

Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
electrical
ports

10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/
s, and
1000
Mbit/s

Fullduplex

UTRPa

Without a
sub-board

UMTS

ATM over
E1/T1 or
IP over E1/
T1

Eight
channels

Fullduplex

UTRPc

Without a
sub-board

GSM

Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
electrical
ports

10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/
s, and
1000
Mbit/s

Fullduplex

Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
optical
ports

100 Mbit/s
and 1000
Mbit/s

Fullduplex

UMTS
LTE

Panel
Figure 3-49 shows the panel of the UTRP2.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-49 Panel of the UTRP2 (with two optical ports)

Figure 3-50 shows the panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4.


Figure 3-50 Panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)

Figure 3-51 shows the panel of the UTRPb4 in GSM mode.


Figure 3-51 Panel of the UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)

Figure 3-52 shows the panel of the UTRP6.


Figure 3-52 Panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)

Figure 3-53 shows the panel of the UTRP9.


Figure 3-53 Panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

The following figure shows the UTRPa panel.


Figure 3-54 UTRPa panel (with eight E1/T1 channels)

Figure 3-55 shows the panel of the UTRPc.


Figure 3-55 Panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)

Functions
The UTRP performs the following functions:
l

Provides extended E1/T1 ports to connect to transmission equipment, supporting ATM,


TDM, and IP transmission.

Provides electrical and optical transmission ports to connect to transmission equipment.

Supports cold backup.

Restriction
The GTMUa cannot be used together with the UTRPc.

Indicators
Table 3-82 describes the indicators on the UTRP panel.
Table 3-82 Indicators on the UTRP panel

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power
supply, but the board
is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

Steady off

There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.

On for 1s and off for


1s

The board is running


properly.

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

l The board is
being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

Steady on

An alarm is
generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.

Steady off

The board is running


properly.

On for 1s and off for


1s

An alarm is
generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.

Steady on

The board serves as


an active board.

Steady off

l The board does


not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.

The ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode has different status from the ACT indicator
on other boards, as listed in Table 3-83.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-83 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

ACT

Green

Steady on

l Before the
configuration
takes effect, none
or both of the two
E1 ports in GSM
mode are
functional.
l The
configuration has
taken effect.

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

Before the
configuration takes
effect, only one E1
port in GSM mode is
functional.

Each Ethernet port on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc corresponds to two indicators indicating
the status of the current link, as listed in Table 3-84.
Table 3-84 Status of the indicators for Ethernet ports on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

LINK

Green

Steady on

The link is connected


properly.

Steady off

The link is not


connected properly.

Blinking

Data is being
transmitted or
received on the link.

Steady off

No data is being
transmitted or
received on the link.

ACT

Orange

There are three indicators on the UTRPc: R0, R1, and R2, of which the status is listed in Table
3-85.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-85 Status of indicators on the UTRPc


Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

R0

Red or green

Steady off

The board is not


working in GSM
mode.

Steady green

The board is working


in GSM mode.

Steady red

Reserved

Steady off

The board is not


working in UMTS
mode.

Steady green

The board is working


in UMTS mode.

Steady red

Reserved

Steady off

The board is not


working in LTE
mode.

Steady green

The board is working


in LTE mode.

Steady red

Reserved

R1

Red or green

R2

Red or green

NOTE

If multiple indicators are on at the same time, the board works in multiple modes.

Ports
Table 3-86 describes the ports on the UTRP2.
Table 3-86 Ports on the panel of the UTRP2 (with 2 optical ports)
Silkscreen

Port Type

Quantity

Connector

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1

FE/GE optical port

SFP female
connector

The UTRP3, UTRP4, UTRPa, and UTRPb4 have the same ports, as listed in Table 3-87.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-87 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, UTRPa, and UTRPb4 (with 8 E1/T1 ports)
Silkscreen

Port Type

Quantity

Connector

E1/T1

E1/T1 port

DB26 female
connector

Table 3-88 lists the ports on the UTRP6.


Table 3-88 Ports on the panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)
Silkscreen

Port Type

Quantity

Connector

STM-1/OC-3

STM-1/OC-3

SFP female
connector

Table 3-89 lists the ports on the UTRP9.


Table 3-89 Ports on the panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)
Silkscreen

Port Type

Quantity

Connector

FE/GE0 to FE/GE3

FE/GE electrical port

RJ45 connector

Table 3-90 describes the ports on the panel of the UTRPc.


Table 3-90 Ports on the panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)
Silkscreen

Port Type

Quantity

Connector

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1

FE/GE optical port

SFP female
connector

FE/GE2 to FE/GE5

FE/GE electrical port

RJ45 connector

DIP Switch
There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.
There are three DIP switches on the UTRP3, UTRP4, UTRPa, and UTRPb4. SW1 and SW2 are
used to set whether to ground the receiver end of the E1 cable, and SW3 is used to set the
resistance of the E1 cable. Figure 3-56 shows the DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4.
Figure 3-57 shows the DIP switches on the UTRPb4. Figure 3-58 shows the DIP switches on
the UTRPa.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 3-56 DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4

Figure 3-57 DIP switches on the UTRPb4

Figure 3-58 DIP switches on the UTRPa

Table 3-91, Table 3-92, and Table 3-93 list the settings of the DIP switches on the UTRP.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 3-91 Settings of SW1 on the UTRP


DIP
Switch
SW1

DIP Setting

Description

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Balanced

ON

ON

ON

ON

Imbalanced

Others

Unavailable

Table 3-92 Settings of SW2 on the UTRP


DIP
Switch

DIP Setting

Description

SW2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Balanced

ON

ON

ON

ON

Imbalanced

Others

Unavailable

NOTICE
SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to No.4 to No.7 E1 channels. SW2
corresponds to No.0 to No.3 E1 channels.

Table 3-93 Settings of SW3 on the UTRP


DIP
Switch

DIP Setting

Description

SW3

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

T1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

The E1
resistance is
set to 120
ohm.

ON

ON

ON

ON

The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.

Others

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Unavailable

134

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

3.3.15 USCU
This section describes the universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU).

Specifications
The USCU falls into three types, as shown in Table 3-94.
Table 3-94 Specifications of the USCU
Board

Supported Mode

Supported Satellite Card

USCUb11

LTE

N/A

USCUb14

GSM

UBLOX single-satellite card

UMTS
LTE
USCUb22

GSM

Naviors dual-satellite card

UMTS
LTE

Panel
There are two types of USCU, as shown in Figure 3-59 and Figure 3-60.
NOTE

On the lower left side of the USCUb11 and USCUb14, there are silkscreens USCUb11 and USCUb14,
respectively, indicating their board types.

Figure 3-59 USCUb11 and USCUb14 panel

Figure 3-60 USCUb22 panel

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Functions
The USCU has the following functions:
l

The USCUb11 provides ports to communicate with the RGPS (for example the reused
equipment of the customer) and BITS equipment. It does not support GPS signals.

The USCUb14 contains a UBLOX satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.

The USCUb22 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a Naviors satellite card, which must
be purchased locally and installed onsite.

Indicators
Table 3-95 and Table 3-96 describe the indicators on the USCU.
Table 3-95 Indicators on the USCU
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power
supply, but the board
is faulty.

Steady off

There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.

On for 1s and off for


1s

The board is
functioning properly.

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

l The board is
being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.

ALM

ACT

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Red

Green

Steady on

An alarm is
generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.

Steady off

The board is running


properly.

On for 1s and off for


1s

An alarm is
generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.

Steady on

The board serves as


an active board.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

Steady off

l The board does


not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.

Table 3-96 Indicators for the TOD ports


Color

Status

Description

Green (on the left)

The green indicator is steady


on and the orange indicator is
steady off.

The TOD port is configured as


an input port.

Orange (on the right)

The orange indicator is steady


on and the green indicator is
steady off.

The TOD port is configured as


an output port.

Ports
Table 3-97 describes the ports on the USCU.
Table 3-97 Ports on the USCU
Silkscreen

Connector

Description

GPS

SMA connector

The GPS ports on the USCUb14 and USCUb22


receive GPS signals.
The GPS port on the USCUb11 is reserved and
cannot receive GPS signals.

RGPS port

PCB welded
wiring terminal

The RGPS port on the USCUb11 receives RGPS


signals.
The RGPS ports on the USCUb14 and USCUb22 are
reserved and cannot receive RGPS signals.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

TOD0 port

RJ45 connector

This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals.

TOD1 port

RJ45 connector

This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals,


and receives TOD signals from the M1000.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

BITS port

SMA connector

This port receives BITS clock signals, supports


adaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock
reference source.

M-1PPS port

SMA connector

This port receives 1PPS signals from the M1000.

3.3.16 UBRI
The universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or
electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the
CPRI.

Panel
Figure 3-61 shows the panel of the UBRI.
Figure 3-61 UBRI panel

Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions:
l

Provides extended CPRI electrical or optical ports.

Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.

Indicators
Table 3-98 describes the indicators on the UBRI panel.
Table 3-98 Indicators on the UBRI panel

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Steady off

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for 1s

The board is running properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

Status

Description

On for 0.125s and off for


0.125s

Software is being loaded to the


board.

Steady on

An alarm is generated on the


board.

Steady off

The board is running properly.

On for 1s and off for 1s

An alarm is generated and you


need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

Steady on

The board serves as an active


board.

Steady off

l The board does not serve as


an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not providing
any services.

The UBRI provides six indicators indicating the status of the CRRI links. The indicators are
above the SFP ports. Table 3-99 describes the indicators.
Table 3-99 CPRI port status indicators
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

CPRIx

Red or green

Steady green

The CPRI link is


functioning properly.

Steady red

An optical module
fails to receive signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

Blinking red (on for


1s and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is out


of lock because of the
following reasons:
l There is no mutual
lock between dualmode clock
sources.
l The data rates of
the CPRI ports do
not match each
other.

Steady off

l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.

Ports
Table 3-100 describes the ports on the UBRI panel.
Table 3-100 Ports on the UBRI panel
Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity

Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5

SFP female
connector

Connecting the BBU


and the RF module

The following table lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI.
Table 3-101 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI
Board

CPRI Port
Quantity

CPRI Port Data


Rate (Gbit/s)

Topology Type

UBRI

1.25/2.5

Star, chain, and ring


topologies

3.3.17 UCIU
The universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) interconnects BBUs. It forwards
control and synchronization information from one BBU to another.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Panel
Figure 3-62 shows the UCIU panel.
Figure 3-62 UCIU panel

Functions
The UCIU performs the following functions:
l

Supports single- or multi-mode configuration and management. When in multi-mode, it is


shared by multiple modes and can be configured and managed by any mode.

Interconnects BBUs and forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU
to another.

Supports co-site of a 3900 series base station and a 3012 series base station.

Supports the connection to a UMPT using a fiber optic cable.

Indicators
A UCIU provides one DB15 port, three running indicators, and six SFP+ ports for
interconnection, with one double-colored indicator on each port. Table 3-102 describes the
indicators on the UCIU panel.
Table 3-102 Indicators on the UCIU panel
Silkscreen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Steady off

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

On for 1s and off for


1s

The board is running properly.

On for 0.125s and off


for 0.125s

l The board is being loaded or


configured.
l The board is not started.

ALM

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Red

Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the


board must be replaced.

Steady off

There is no fault.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

ACT

Color

Green

Status

Description

On for 1s and off for


1s

An alarm is generated and you


need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.

Steady on

The board serves as an active


board.

Steady off

l The board does not serve as


an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not providing
any services.

M0 to M4
and S0

Red or green

Steady green

The inter-BBU transmission


link is normal.

Steady red

The optical module fails to


transmit or receive signals, or
the fiber optic cable is faulty.

Blinking red (on for


0.125s and off for
0.125s)

Cables are connected in an


incorrect manner. For example:
l In the UCIU+UMPT
scenario, the S0 port on the
UCIU is connected to the CI
port on the UMPT.
Indicators for the S0 and CI
ports are blinking.
l The ports are connected in
ring topology. Indicators for
all incorrectly connected
ports are blinking.

Steady off

The optical module cannot be


detected.

Ports
Table 3-103 describes UCIU ports.
Table 3-103 UCIU ports

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

M0 to M4

SFP female
connector

Primary inter-BBU ports, which connect to the


secondary inter-BBU ports.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

S0

SFP female
connector

Secondary inter-BBU port, which connects to the


primary inter-BBU port.

GCK

DB15 connector

Provides reference clocks when the base station


and a 3012 series base station are combined.

3.4 GATM
The GSM Antenna and TMA control Module (GATM) controls the antenna and TMA.

Panel
Figure 3-63 shows the GATM panel.
Figure 3-63 GATM panel

Function
The GATM has the following functions:
l

Controls the RET antenna.

Supplies power to the TMA.

Reports the RET control signal alarms.

Monitors the current from the feeder.


NOTE

The GATM cannot support the TMA and RET antenna simultaneously.

LED
On the GATM there are three LEDs, which indicate the operating status of the GATM. Table
3-104 describes the LEDs on the GATM.
Table 3-104 LEDs on the GATM

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 2s and OFF for 2s

The power supply is normal, but the


communication with the BBU incurs
faults.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

LED

ACT

ALM

Color

Green

Red

Status

Description

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The module is functional and


communicates with the BBU
properly.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


module is faulty.

ON

The AISG link is available.

OFF

The AISG link is unavailable.

Blinking irregularly

The AISG link is in transmission


state.

ON

An alarm is generated, such as an


overcurrent alarm.

OFF

The module is functional.

Port ID
There are eight ports on the GATM, of which six are used to supply power to the TMA or transmit
the RET control signals, one is used to connect the GATM to the BBU, and one is used as an
extended RS485 port. In addition, there is also a -48 V DC power supply socket. Table 3-105
describes the ports and socket on the GATM.
Table 3-105 Ports and socket on the GATM
Port ID

Connector

Function

ANT0 to ANT5

SMA female connector

Providing power and transmitting control


signals for the RET antenna

COM1

RJ45 connector

Connecting to the BBU

COM2

RJ45 connector

Serving as an extended RS485 port for


connecting to other devices

-48 V

3V3 power connector

Feeding -48 V DC power

3.5 EMU
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMU) is an environmental monitoring device that monitors
environmental conditions of the equipment room.
The EMU connects to main equipment and performs monitoring functions through the alarm
cables. The EMU performs the following functions:

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

3 Modules in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Provides monitoring ports for the temperature, humidity, water, infrared, door control
sensors, Boolean signals, analog signals, and output control signals.

Provides the RS485 and RS232 ports for the communication with the base station.

For details about the structure and functions of the EMU, see EMU User Guide.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Power Distribution Scheme and Power


Devices of the BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter


This chapter describes configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power
distribution scheme, and components in the power system of the BTS3900 cabinet.
4.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables
This section describes the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables for the BTS3900. The recommended configurations are based on a fully configured
base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for the customer
equipment in the cabinet are also included.
4.2 Power Distribution Schemes of the Cabinet
This section describes the power distribution schemes of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V), BTS3900
DC (+24 V), and BTS3900 AC.
4.3 Power Equipment (DC/DC)
The power equipment (DC/DC) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power.
4.4 Power Equipment (AC/DC)
The power equipment (AC/DC) converts AC power into -48 V DC power.
4.5 DCDU-01
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-01 (DCDU-01) supplies DC power to each component in
the cabinet.
4.6 DCDU-03B
The direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) provides DC power input for RRUs
installed outside a cabinet.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

4.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and


Power Cables
This section describes the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables for the BTS3900. The recommended configurations are based on a fully configured
base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for the customer
equipment in the cabinet are also included.
NOTE

l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations.
l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled
by a pole.

DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but without RRUs


Table 4-1 lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V
DC or +24 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Table 4-1 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900
configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power
Supply

Maximum
Configuratio
ns in a
Cabinet(1)

Minimum
Configuration
s of the UpperLevel Circuit
Breaker(2)(4)

CrossSectional Area
of the Input
Power Cable(3)

Length of the
Input Power
Cable

+24 V DC

l 1 to 6 lowpower
RFUs

2x100 A/1 P (by


default)

25 mm2 (0.039
in.2)

15 m (49.21
ft)

l 1 BBU
-48 V DC

l 4 to 6 lowpower
RFUs

1x160 A/1 P
1x80 A/1 P (by
default)

16 mm2 (0.025
in.2)

l 1 BBU
l 1 to 3 lowpower
RFUs

1x63 A/1 P (by


default)

l 1 BBU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet
NOTE

(1) Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers:
l

The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable
to a small configuration scenario.

The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers
with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load
capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.

(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met:
l

Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.

Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.

Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.

(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power
consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.

DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs


l

When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment
supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01. The DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the
RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in a cabinet. The configurations of upper-level circuit
breakers and power cables in this scenario are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured
with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see the configurations of upper-level circuit
breakers when the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power in Table 4-1.

The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-03B, and the
DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to RRUs. Table 4-2 lists the configurations of upperlevel circuit breakers and power cables in this scenario.

Table 4-2 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900
configured with RFUs and RRUs

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Maximum
Configurations
in a Cabinet(1)(4)

Minimum
Configurations of
the Upper-Level
Circuit Breaker(2)

Cross-Sectional
Area of the Input
Power Cable(3)

Length of the Input


Power Cable

4 to 6 RRUs (power
consumption of
each RRU 300
W)

1x63 A/1 P

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)


for a group of DC
input power cables

10 m (99.21 lb)

1 to 3 RRUs (power
consumption of
each RRU 300
W)

1x63 A/1 P

4 to 6 RRUs (300 W
< power
consumption of
each RRU 400
W)

1x80 A/1 P (by


default)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

Maximum
Configurations
in a Cabinet(1)(4)

Minimum
Configurations of
the Upper-Level
Circuit Breaker(2)

1 to 3 RRUs (300 W
< power
consumption of
each RRU 400
W)

1x63 A/1 P

l 3 RRUs (power
consumption of
each RRU
300 W)

1x80 A/1 P

Cross-Sectional
Area of the Input
Power Cable(3)

Length of the Input


Power Cable

l 3 RRUs (300 W
< power
consumption of
each RRU
400 W)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description
NOTE

(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows:


l

The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is equal to or less than 300 W: RRU3804,
RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3638, RRU3824,
RRU3826, RRU3821E, and RRU3838.

The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3908,
RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3926, RRU3222,
RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3628, RRU3642, RRU3632, RRU3008, RRU3805, and
RRU3936.

(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers:
l

The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable
to a small configuration scenario.

The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers
with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load
capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.

(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met:
l

Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.

Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.

Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.

(4) The maximum configurations in a cabinet are the full configuration of modules in the cabinet.
l

When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit
breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.

If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full
configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the
requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base
station capacity expansion.

When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers
corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit
breakers that support 350 W.

AC Input
Table 4-3 lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a
BTS3900 is supplied with AC power.
Table 4-3 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Power Supply

Minimum
Configurations of
the Upper-Level
Circuit Breaker

Cross-Sectional
Area of the Input
Power Cable

Length of the Input


Power Cable

220 V AC threephase

1x16 A/3 P (by


default)

2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2)

15 m (49.21 ft)

220 V AC singlephase

1x32 A/1 P (by


default)

6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)

110 V AC dual-livewire

1x32 A/2 P (by


default)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description
NOTE

An insulation cable with two insulation layers and four wires is used for AC three-phase power. An
insulation cable with two insulation layers and three wires is used for AC single-phase and 110 V duallive-wire power.

4.2 Power Distribution Schemes of the Cabinet


This section describes the power distribution schemes of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V), BTS3900
DC (+24 V), and BTS3900 AC.

Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs


but Without RRUs
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01 in a BTS3900 DC
cabinet (-48 V), and the DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly
in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.
Figure 4-1 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but
without RRUs

Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs


and RRUs
l

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment
supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01, and the DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to
the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme in this
scenario is the same as that for a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) configured with RFUs but
without RRUs. For details, see Figure 3.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-03B, and the
DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power
distribution scheme in this scenario.

Figure 4-2 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and
RRUs

Power Distribution Scheme of the BTS3900 DC (+24 V)


When the BTS3900 cabinet uses +24 V DC power, the DC/DC power device converts +24 V
DC power into -48 V DC power and feeds -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01. Then, the DCDU-01
feeds power to each module in the cabinet. Figure 4-3 shows the power distribution scheme of
the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC). Like the power distribution scheme of a single cabinet, two
cabinets are supplied by the external power device.
Figure 4-3 Power distribution scheme of the BTS3900 DC (+24 V)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Power Distribution Scheme of the BTS3900 AC


The external power equipment supplies 220 V AC single-phase, 220 V AC three-phase, or 110
V dual-live-wire power to a BTS3900 AC cabinet. The EPS4890 converts the AC power into
-48 V DC power and then supplies the DC power to a DCDU-01. The DCDU-01 distributes the
DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the
power distribution scheme in this scenario.
NOTE

The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC single-phase
scenarios, except that L1, L2, and L3 input terminals do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the
220 V AC three-phase scenarios.

Figure 4-4 Power distribution schemes in AC scenarios

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

4.3 Power Equipment (DC/DC)


The power equipment (DC/DC) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power.

4.3.1 Components of the Power Equipment (DC/DC)


The power equipment (DC/DC) consists of the PSUs (DC/DC) and power subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 4-5 shows the power equipment (DC/DC).
Figure 4-5 Power equipment (DC/DC)

(1) PSUs (DC/DC)

(2) Power subrack (DC/DC)

Table 4-4 describes the components of the power equipment (DC/DC).


Table 4-4 Components of the power equipment (DC/DC)
Component

Description

PSU (DC/DC)

For details, see 4.3.2 PSU (DC/DC).

Power subrack (DC/DC)

For details, see 4.3.3 Power Subrack (DC/


DC).

4.3.2 PSU (DC/DC)


The PSU is the power supply unit. The PSU (DC/DC) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC
power.

Panel
Figure 4-6 shows the panel of the PSU (DC/DC).

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 4-6 Panel of the PSU (DC/DC)

(1) Power LED

(2) Protection LED

(3) Fault LED

Functions
l

Converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power and leads the -48 V DC power into the
DCDU-01.

Monitors the unit and reports alarms related to PSU faults (such as output overvoltage, no
output, and fan faults), alarms related to PSU protection (such as overtemperature
protection, and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and PSU out-of-position
alarms, if any.

LEDs
Table 4-5 describes the LEDs on the panel of the PSU (DC/DC).
Table 4-5 LEDs on the panel of the PSU (DC/DC)
LED

Color

Status

Description

Power LED

Green

Steady on

The power supply is


normal.

Steady off

There is no power
input, or the fuse is
damaged.

Steady off

The running status is


normal.

Protection LED

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Yellow

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

LED

Color

Fault LED

Red

Status

Description

Steady on

There is abnormal
input or output
voltage, the unit is
overheated, or the
unit is not properly
inserted.

Steady off

The running status is


normal.

Blinking

The fan is faulty.

4.3.3 Power Subrack (DC/DC)


The power subrack (DC/DC) provides the power input wiring terminals, power output wiring
terminals, ALM port, and PRESENT port. The terminals and ports are used for the connections
of the +24 V input power cables, -48 V output power cables, monitoring signal cable for the
PSU, and in-position signal cable for the PSU respectively.

Exterior
Figure 4-7 shows the power subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 4-7 Power Subrack (DC/DC)

(1) Power input wiring


terminals

(2) PRESENT port

(3) ALM port

(4) Power output wiring


terminals

Ports
Table 4-6 describes the ports and terminals on the power subrack (DC/DC).
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Table 4-6 Ports and terminals on the power subrack (DC/DC)


Terminal/
Port

Label

Connector

Description

Power input
wiring terminal

DC INPUT

OT terminal

The + wiring terminals are used for the


connections of +24 V power cables, and
the - wiring terminals are used for the
connections of +24 V RTN cables.

Power output
wiring terminal

DC
OUTPUT

OT terminal

The LOAD- wiring terminals are used


for the connections of the -48 V power
cables, and the RTN+ wiring terminals
are used for the connections of the -48 V
RTN cables.

Alarm signal
port

ALM

Cord end
terminal

The ALM port is used for the connection


of the monitoring signal cable for the
PSU.

PRESENT port

PRESENT

RJ45
connector

The PRESENT port is used for the


connection of the in-position signal
cable for the PSU.

4.4 Power Equipment (AC/DC)


The power equipment (AC/DC) converts AC power into -48 V DC power.

4.4.1 Components of the Power Equipment (AC/DC)


The power equipment (AC/DC) consists of the PMU, PSUs (AC/DC) and power subrack (AC/
DC).
Figure 4-8 shows the power equipment (AC/DC).
Figure 4-8 Power equipment (AC/DC)

(1) PMU

(2) PSUs (AC/DC)

(3) Power subrack (AC/DC)

Table 4-7 describes the components of the power equipment (AC/DC).


Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Table 4-7 Components of the power equipment (AC/DC)


Component

Description

PMU

For details, see 4.4.2 PMU.

PSU (AC/DC)

For details, see 4.4.3 PSU (AC/DC).

Power subrack (AC/DC)

For details, see 4.4.4 Power Subrack (AC/


DC).

4.4.2 PMU
The Power Monitoring Unit (PMU) performs the power system management, power distribution
detection, and alarm reporting functions.

Exterior
Figure 4-9 shows the PMU.
Figure 4-9 PMU

Functions
The PMU performs the following functions:
l

Communicates with the BBU or upper-level PMU through an RS232/RS422 serial port.

Manages the power system and battery charge/discharge.

Detects and reports water damage alarms, smoke alarms, door status alarms, and
customized Boolean values.

Reports the ambient temperature, ambient humidity, battery temperature, and customized
analog values.

Monitors power distribution, reports related alarms, and reports dry contact alarms.

Ports and LEDs


Figure 4-10 shows the front panel of the PMU.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Figure 4-10 Front panel of the PMU

(1) RS232/RS422 ports

(2) LEDs

(3) Power supply test ports

(4) TEST port

(5) Battery control switch

(6) COM port

Table 4-8 describes the ports and switch on the PMU.


Table 4-8 Ports and switch on the PMU
Port/Switch

Function

RS232/RS422 port

Communicating with the BBU or upper-level PMU

Power supply test port

Measuring the power voltage by using a multimeter through the


-48V/+24V and 0V ports

TEST port

Testing

Battery control switch

Controlling the connection of the batteries through the ON and OFF


ports
l Press and hold the ON port for 5s to 10s to connect to the
batteries.
l Press and hold the OFF port for 5s to 10s to disconnect the
batteries.
NOTICE
l You must insert a small round bar into the hole when you operate the
battery control switch. When you hear a crack, the batteries are connected
or disconnected.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Port/Switch

Function

COM port

Reserved for connecting to the external signal monitoring board

Table 4-9 describes the LEDs on the panel of the PMU.


Table 4-9 LEDs on the panel of the PMU
Label

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Blinking (on for 1s and


off for 1s)

The PMU is functional and communicating


with the main control board in the BBU
properly. (This status does not necessarily
mean that the main control board has been
configured with the PMU.)

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

The unit is functional, but the communication


with the BBU fails. If the unit does not
communicate with the main control board in
the BBU for one minute, the communication
is regarded as failed.

On or off

The unit is faulty or the unit is in power-on


self-check state.

On

The base station reports at least one of the


following alarms:

ALM

Red

l Mains overvoltage or undervoltage alarm


l Busbar overvoltage or undervoltage
alarm
l Alarm related to PSUs
l Load disconnection alarm
Off

No alarm is reported.

NOTE

In 3s to 5s after the PMU is powered on, the ALM and RUN LEDs are simultaneously on for about 3s.

DIP Switch
The DIP switch, which is used to choose monitoring address, is positioned on the right panel of
the PMU. The DIP switch has eight bits, which are set before the PMU is delivered, as shown
in Figure 4-11.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Figure 4-11 Right panel of the PMU

4.4.3 PSU (AC/DC)


The PSU is a power supply unit. The PSU (AC/DC) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC
power.

Exterior
Figure 4-12 shows the panel of the PSU (AC/DC).
Figure 4-12 Panel of the PSU (AC/DC)

(1) Power LED

(2) Protection LED

(3) Fault LED

Functions
The PSU (AC/DC) performs the following functions:
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and supplies -48 V DC power to the
DCDU-01.

Monitors the unit and reports alarms related to PSU faults (such as output overvoltage, no
output, and fan faults), alarms related to PSU protection (such as overtemperature
protection, and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and PSU out-of-position alarm,
if any.

LEDs
Table 4-10 describes the LEDs on the panel of the PSU (AC/DC).
Table 4-10 LEDs on the panel of the PSU (AC/DC)
LED

Color

Status

Description

Power LED

Green

On

The power supply is


normal.

Off

There are faults (such


as no AC input, or
overvoltage and
undervoltage of AC
input) on the mains,
or the PSU has no
output.

Off

The running status is


normal.

On

There is a pre-alarm
relating to
temperature or the
fan.

Off

The PSU is normal,


or the PSU has no
output because of
faults (such as no AC
input, or overvoltage
and undervoltage of
AC input) on the
mains.

On

There is no output
because of output
overvoltage
shutdown, the fan
fault,
overtemperature
shutdown, remote
shutdown, or an
internal PSU fault.

Protection LED

Fault LED

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Yellow

Red

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

4.4.4 Power Subrack (AC/DC)


The power subrack (AC/DC) provides the power input wiring terminals, wiring terminals for
batteries, and battery power output wiring terminal. The terminals are used for the connections
of the input power cables, output power cables, and power cable for the batteries respectively.

Panel
Figure 4-13 shows the panel of the power subrack (AC/DC).
Figure 4-13 Panel of the power subrack (AC/DC)

(1) Power input wiring terminals

(2) Power switch of the batteries

(3) Wiring terminals for batteries

(4) Power output wiring terminals

Ports
Table 4-11 describes the terminals and switch on the power subrack (AC/DC).
Table 4-11 Terminals and switch on the power subrack (AC/DC)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Terminal/Switch

Description

Power input wiring terminals

These terminals are used for the connections of


the AC input power cables.

Power output wiring terminals

The LOAD1(-) and LOAD2(-) wiring


terminals are used for the connections of the
-48 V power cables, and the RTN(+) wiring
terminals are used for the connections of the
-48 V RTN cables.

Wiring terminals for batteries

The BAT(-) wiring terminal is used for the


connection of negative pole for the batteries,
and the BAT(+) wiring terminal is used for the
connection of positive pole for the batteries.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Terminal/Switch

Description

Power switch of the batteries

The power switch controls the connection of


the batteries.

4.5 DCDU-01
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-01 (DCDU-01) supplies DC power to each component in
the cabinet.

Panel
Figure 4-14 shows the panel of the DCDU-01.
Figure 4-14 Panel of the DCDU-01

Functions
The DCDU-01 has the following functions:
l

Supports one -48 V DC inputs.

Supports ten -48 V DC outputs. One 25 A output to SPARE2 port, and nine 12 A outputs
to other ports.

Supplies power to only the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly in the cabinet, but not external
devices.

Ports
The following figure shows the ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Figure 4-15 Ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel

The following table describes the ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel.
Table 4-12 Ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

No.

Port/
Terminal/
Circuit
Breaker

Silkscreen

Description

(1)

DC input
terminals

NEG(-)

It is a negative power input terminal.

RTN(+)

It is a positive power input terminal.

(2)

Circuit
breakers

SPARE2, SPARE1,
BBU, FAN, and RFU5
to RFU0

They are ten power output circuit


breakers which control power supply to
the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly.

(3)

DC output
ports

SPARE2, SPARE1,
BBU, FAN, and RFU5
to RFU0

They are ten power output ports which


feed power to the BBU, RFUs, and fan
assembly.

(4)

SPD alarm
port

SPD ALM

This port is unavailable.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Technical Specifications
Table 4-13 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-01.
Table 4-13 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-01
Item

Specification

Dimension (H x W x D)

The DCDU-01 is 1 U (44.45 mm or 1.75 in.)


high and can be installed in a 19 inch cabinet
or rack. Its dimensions are as follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
17.4 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting
ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)

Surge protection specifications of ports on


DCDU-01

-48 V DC port, differential mode: 2kV


(1.2/50s)
-48 V DC port, common mode: 4kV
(1.2/50s)

4.6 DCDU-03B
The direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) provides DC power input for RRUs
installed outside a cabinet.

Exterior
Figure 4-16 shows the DCDU-03B.
Figure 4-16 DCDU-03B

Functions
The DCDU-03B provides nine -48 V DC power outputs.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 4-14 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B.


Table 4-14 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B
DC Output
Terminal

Power-Consuming
Device

Specification of
the Circuit
Breaker

Circuit Breaker

LOAD0 to LOAD5

RRU

20 A

SW0 to SW5

LOAD6 to LOAD8

Reserved

12 A

SW6 to SW8

Ports
Figure 4-17 shows the ports on the DCDU-03B panel.
Figure 4-17 Ports on the DCDU-03B panel

Table 4-15 describes the terminals and switches on the DCDU-03B panel.
Table 4-15 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-03B panel
Terminal

Label

Matched Terminal
and Cable

Description

DC input
terminal

NEG(-)

Copper bar

Negative power input wiring


terminal

RTN(+)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Positive power input wiring


terminal

167

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

Terminal

Label

Matched Terminal
and Cable

Description

DC output
terminal

LOAD0 to
LOAD8

Nine one-hole OT
terminals (M4). The
maximum crosssectional area of the
cable supported is 6
mm2 (0.009 in.2).

There are three rows of output


wiring terminals: NEG(-), RTN
(+), and PGND. The last three
groups of terminals in the PGND
row support M4 two-hole OT
terminals, as shown in the red
frame in Figure 4-17.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices


of the BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter


The BTS3900 monitoring system monitors all boards and components in the cabinet. If any
board or component is faulty, an alarm is reported automatically. The alarm signals are collected
both inside and outside the cabinet by the UPEU, UEIU, or EMU to ensure that the entire base
station can be monitored.
5.1 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinet
The BTS3900 cabinet is managed by monitoring boards, such as the FMU and PMU. Each
monitoring board is connected to the MON port on the BBU. They collect alarms of all
components and report the alarms to the BBU by using the RS485 serial bus.
5.2 Customized Alarm Inputs
When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the
BBU.
5.3 Monitoring Boards of the BTS3900
The monitoring boards of the BTS3900 collect monitoring signals and then report the monitoring
signals to BBU3900.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

5.1 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinet


The BTS3900 cabinet is managed by monitoring boards, such as the FMU and PMU. Each
monitoring board is connected to the MON port on the BBU. They collect alarms of all
components and report the alarms to the BBU by using the RS485 serial bus.
For details about functions of the monitoring ports on the FMU, see Fan Assembly. The FMU
is configured in the BTS3900 (-48 V DC), BTS3900 (+24 V DC), and BTS3900 (AC). For details
about the position of the FMU in the cabinet, see Module Configurations in the Cabinet and Fan
Assembly.
Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 shows the monitoring system of the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC).
Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show the monitoring systems for the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC)
and BTS3900 cabinet (AC) respectively. In triple-mode scenarios where two BBUs are
configured, BBU 0 and BBU 1 are installed in Cabinet 0 and Cabinet 1 respectively, and all
the monitoring equipment is connected to only BBU 0. The monitoring principles for the triplemode scenarios are the same as those for the single-mode or dual-mode scenarios.
NOTE

In this document, the two BBUs in a triple-mode scenario are described as BBU 0 and BBU 1 for clarity.
The BBU 0 is root BBU, and the BBU 1 is leaf BBU.

Figure 5-1 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 DC (-48V) cabinet (single mode/dual mode
scenario)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 5-2 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 DC (-48V) cabinet (triple-mode scenario)

Figure 5-3 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 DC (+24V) cabinet

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 5-4 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 AC cabinet

NOTE

For details about how to monitor the EMU, see the section 5.2 Customized Alarm Inputs.

5.2 Customized Alarm Inputs


When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the
BBU.
Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods:
l

The alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU.

The alarms are collected by the EMU.

For details about the configuration of the customized alarms, see the related initial configuration
guide.

Monitoring Board
If customer equipment has customized alarms to report to the BBU, a monitoring board needs
to be configured for the customer equipment according to the actual number of the customized
alarms, as listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Number of customized alarms supported by the monitoring board

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Monitoring Board

Number of Customized Alarms

UPEU

UEIU

UPEU+UEIU

16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

Monitoring Board

Number of Customized Alarms

EMUA

32

NOTE

l The combination of UPEU+UEIU/UPEU can support 16 Boolean alarms.


l If backup power is required by the BBU, two UPEUs are configured instead of UPEU+UEIU.
l A base station supports a maximum of 32 Boolean alarms.
l Analog values can be monitored only by the EMU. If an EMU is configured, all Boolean alarms are
reported by the EMU.
l An EMU with a sensor can be configured according to onsite requirements.
NOTE

In a BTS3900 (+24 V) cabinet, all customized alarms must be collected by an EMU.

Customized Alarms Collected by the UPEU or UEIU


Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of two
UPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured for the BBU to receive 16 Boolean alarm inputs.
This method can be used for the configuration of fewer than 16 customized alarm inputs. The
method to collect customized alarms by using the UPEU or UEIU is shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU

Customized Alarms Collected by the EMU


If there are more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs, the EMU can be configured for the BTS3900.
Each EMU supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs, the cable connections
are shown in Figure 5-6.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

5 Monitoring Scheme and Monitoring Devices of the


BTS3900 Cabinet

The cable connection of the EMU in the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC) and BTS3900 cabinet
(+24 V DC): The EMU is connected to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

The cable connection of the EMU in the BTS3900 cabinet (AC): The EMU is connected
to the right RS232/RS422 port on the PMU in the AC/DC power equipment.

Figure 5-6 Customized alarms collected by the EMU

5.3 Monitoring Boards of the BTS3900


The monitoring boards of the BTS3900 collect monitoring signals and then report the monitoring
signals to BBU3900.
A BTS3900 cabinet is monitored by the FMU and PMU.
6.1 Fan Assembly describes the exterior, function, and ports of FMU.
4.4.2 PMU describes the exterior, function, and ports of PMU.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

About This Chapter


This section describes the components in the BTS3900.
6.1 Fan Assembly
A fan assembly consists of a fan tray, four fans, and an FMU.
6.2 ELU
The Electronic Label Unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate
troubleshooting.
6.3 PS4890 Cabinet
The PS4890 provides an auxiliary solution for the indoor applications of Huawei wireless
products. It supplies DC power and backup power to the distributed base station or BTS3900.
It can also provide space for installing the BBU and transmission devices indoors. For details,
see the PS4890 User Guide.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

6.1 Fan Assembly


A fan assembly consists of a fan tray, four fans, and an FMU.

Exterior of the Fan Assembly


Figure 6-1 shows the exterior of a fan assembly.
Figure 6-1 Exterior of the Fan Assembly

(2) Fan tray

(1) Fan

(3) FMU

Function of the Fan Assembly


The fan assembly performs the following functions:
l

Provides forced ventilation and heat dissipation for the cabinet.

Monitors the temperature.

Supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.

Stops the fans when the ambient temperature is low.

FMU
Figure 6-2 shows the ports on the FMU board.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 6-2 Ports on the FMU board

Table 6-1 and Table 6-2 describes the LEDs and Ports on the FMU board.
Table 6-1 LEDs on the FMU board
LED

Color

Status

Meaning

RUN

Green

Blinking (on for 0.125s


and off for 0.125s)

The unit is functional but fails to


communicate with the BBU or upperlevel FMU.

Blinking (on for 1s and off


for 1s)

The unit is functional and is


communicating with the BBU or
upper-level FMU.

Off

There is no power supply, or the


module is faulty.

Blinking (on for 1s and off


for 1s)

The module is reporting alarms.

Off

No alarm is generated.

ALM

Red

Table 6-2 Ports on the FMU board

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Port Type

Label

Connector
Type

Description

Power port

-48 V

3V3 power
connector

The port is used to


introduce the -48 V DC
power supply.

Sensor port

SENSOR

RJ45 connector

The port is connected to the


ELU.

Communicatio
n port

COM OUT

RJ45 connector

The port is connected to the


lower-level FMU.

COM IN

RJ45 connector

The port is connected to the


BBU or upper-level FMU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

6.2 ELU
The Electronic Label Unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate
troubleshooting.
The ELU is installed in the left side of the air intake vent. Figure 6-3 shows the position and
exterior of the ELU in a BTS3900 cabinet.
Figure 6-3 ELU

1. ELU

2. RJ45 connector

6.3 PS4890 Cabinet


The PS4890 provides an auxiliary solution for the indoor applications of Huawei wireless
products. It supplies DC power and backup power to the distributed base station or BTS3900.
It can also provide space for installing the BBU and transmission devices indoors. For details,
see the PS4890 User Guide.
Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5 shows the cable connections between the BTS3900 and the PS4890.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Figure 6-4 Cable connections when PS4890 is stacked with BTS3900

Figure 6-5 Cable connections when PS4890 is cascaded with BTS3900

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

6 Components in the BTS3900 Cabinet

Table 6-3 lists the cables between the BTS3900 and the PS4890.
Table 6-3 Cables between the BTS3900 and the PS4890

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

SN

Cable

P1, P2

For details, see Output Power Cable for the


DCDU-04

S1

For details, see 7.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for


the PMU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

BTS3900 Cables

About This Chapter


The BTS3900 cables consist of the PGND cable, power cable, transmission cable, CPRI cable,
signal cable, and RF cable.
NOTE

The colors of cables vary according to the countries and areas where Huawei products are delivered. If
cables are purchased at local market, the colors of the cables must comply with the rules and regulations.

7.1 List of BTS3900 Cables


This section describes the BTS3900 cables, which are the power cables, PGND cables,
transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables.
7.2 Cable Connections
The power cables, transmission cables, CPRI cables, monitoring signal cables, and RF cables
in a cabinet must be connected on the basis of separate cable connection principles.
7.3 BTS3900 Power Cable
The BTS3900 power cables consist of the cables leading power to the BTS3900 cabinet,
BBU3900, DCDU-01, fan box, RFU, and transmission equipment.
7.4 BTS3900 Transmission Cable
The BTS3900 transmission cable includes E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable,
Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports, and Interconnection Cable Between the
FE Optical Ports.
7.5 BTS3900 Signal Cable
This chapter describes the functions of signal cables of BTS3900.
7.6 BTS3900 RF Cable
The BTS3900 RF cables are the RF jumper and inter-RFU RF signal cable.
7.7 CPRI Electrical Cable
The CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and the
RFU.
7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multimode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber
optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.
7.9 PGND Cables
The PGND cables are used to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet and the modules in the
cabinet. The maximum length of a PGND cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).
7.10 Equipotential Cable
When the battery cabinet is working with the power cabinet, one cabinet should be grounded
through connecting the equipotential cable to the other cabinet.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

7.1 List of BTS3900 Cables


This section describes the BTS3900 cables, which are the power cables, PGND cables,
transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables.

PGND Cables and Equipotential Cables


Table 7-1 lists the PGND cables and equipotential cables.
Table 7-1 PGND Cables and Equipotential Cables
Item

Cables to be
installed on
site

Cables
installed
before
delivery

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

PGND cable
for the
cabinet

OT terminal

The main
PGND
terminal
inside the
cabinet

OT terminal

External
ground bar

7.10
Equipotenti
al Cable

OT terminal

Wiring
terminal for
the
equipotential
cable

OT terminal

Wiring
terminal for
the
equipotential
cable

PGND cable
for the
modules

OT terminal

PGND
terminals of
the modules

OT terminal

PGND
terminals
inside the
cabinet.

Power Cables
Table 7-2 lists the power cables.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Table 7-2 Power Cables


Item

Cables to be
installed on
site

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

OT terminal

DCDU-01/
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)

Depending
on the
external
power
equipment

External
power
supply
device

OT terminal

Power input
wiring
terminals of
the power
subrack
(DC/DC)

Depending
on the
external
power
equipment

External
power
supply
device

OT terminal

Power input
wiring
terminals of
the power
subrack
(AC/DC)

Depending
on the
external
power
equipment

External
power
supply
device

7.3.7 RRU
Power
Cables

OT terminal

One of the
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
ports on the
DCDU-03B

Depending
on the RRU
model

Power port
on an RRU

7.3.3
DCDU-03B
Power
Cable

OT terminal

l Black
wire:
RTN(+)
terminal
on the
DCDU-0
3B

Depending
on the
external
power
equipment

External
power
equipment

Parallel
terminal

DCDU-01/
RFU0~
RFU5

7.3.1 Input
Power
Cable for
the Cabinet
(-48 V power
cable)
7.3.1 Input
Power
Cable for
the Cabinet
(+24 V
power cable)
7.3.1 Input
Power
Cable for
the Cabinet
(AC power
cable)

l Blue
wire:
NEG(-)
terminal
on the
DCDU-0
3B
Cables
installed

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

7.3.6 Power
Cable for
the RFU

3V3 power
connector

RFU/PWR

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Item

before
delivery

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

7.3.5 Power
Cable for
the Fan
Assembly

3V3 power
connector

Fan
assembly/
-48V

Parallel
terminal

DCDU-01/
FAN

7.3.4 Power
Cable for
the BBU

3V3 power
connector

UPEU/- 48V

Parallel
terminal

DCDU-01/
BBU

GATM
Power
Cable

3V3
connector

-48V port on
the GATM

Parallel
terminal

SPARE1 or
SPARE2
port on the
DCDU-01

7.3.2 Power
Cable for
the
DCDU-01

OT terminal

DCDU-01/
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)

OT terminal

The power
subrack
(DC/DC)/
RTN(+) and
LOAD(-)

OT terminal

DCDU-01/
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)

OT terminal

The power
subrack
(AC/DC)/
RTN(+),
LOAD1(-)
or LOAD2
(-)

(BTS3900
DC cabinet)
7.3.2 Power
Cable for
the
DCDU-01
(BTS3900
AC cabinet)

Transmission Cables and CPRI cables


Table 7-3 lists the transmission cables and CPRI cables.
Table 7-3 Transmission Cables and CPRI cables
Item

Cables to be
installed on
site

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Cable

7.4.1 E1/T1
Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

DB26 male
connector

GTMU or
WMPT or
UTRP/E1/
T1

External
transmission
equipment

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Item

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

7.4.2 FE/GE
Ethernet
Cable

RJ45

BBU/
GTMU or
WMPT or
UTRP or
UMPT/FE0
and FE1

RJ45

Routing
device

7.4.3 FE/GE
Fiber Optic
Cable

LC
connector

BBU/
GTMU or
WMPT or
UMPT or
UTRP/FE1

l FC
connecto
r

Routing
device

BBU/LMPT
or UMPT/
SFP0 or
SFP1
7.7 CPRI
Electrical
Cable

SFP20 male
connector

(intercabinet CPRI
cable)

l BBU/
GTMU
or UBRI/
CPRI

l SC
connecto
r
l LC
connecto
r
SFP20 male
connector

RFU/CPRI

l BBU/
WBBP/
CPRI
l BBU/
LBBP/
CPRI

Cables
installed
before
delivery

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

7.4.4
Interconnec
tion Cable
Between the
FE
Electrical
Ports

RJ45

BBU/
GTMU/FE0

RJ45

BBU/
WMPT/FE0

7.4.5
Interconnec
tion Cable
Between FE
Optical
Ports

LC
connector

BBU/
GTMU/FE1

LC
connector

BBU/
WMPT/FE1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Item

Cable

7.7 CPRI
Electrical
Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

SFP20 male
connector

l BBU/
GTMU/
CPRI

SFP20 male
connector

RFU/CPRI

(intracabinet CPRI
cable)

l BBU/
WBBP/
CPRI
l BBU/
LBBP/
CPRI

Signal Cables
Table 7-4 lists the signal cables.
Table 7-4 Signal Cables
Item

Cables to be
installed on
site

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

7.5.6
Monitoring
Signal
Cable for
the EMU

DB9 male
connector

EMU/
RS485

RJ45
connector

UEIU or
UEIU/
MON1

7.5.11 BBU
Alarm
Cable

RJ45
connector

UPEU or
UEIU/EXTALM0

RJ45
connector

External
alarm device

RET
Control
Signal
Cable

SMA elbow
male
connector

ANT0 to
ANT5 ports
on the
GATM

SMA
straight male
connector

DC/OOK
port on the
DIN BiasTee

7.5.15
Adapter
Used for
Local
Maintenanc
e

USB
connector

USB(1) port
on the
UMPT in the
BBU

Network
connector

Network
cable

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Item

Cables
installed
before
delivery

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

7.5.12 GPS
Clock
Signal
Cable

SMA male
connector

USCU/GPS

Type N
female
connector

GPS surge
protector

7.5.1
Monitoring
Signal
Cable for
the PMU

RJ45
connector

PMU/
COM_IN

RJ45
connector

UPEU/
MON1

7.5.3
Monitoring
Signal
Cable for
the PSU
(DC/DC)

Cord end
terminal

power
subrack (DC/
DC)/ALM

RJ45
connector

UPEU/
EXT-ALM0

7.5.2 InPosition
Signal
Cable for
the PSU
(DC/DC)

RJ45
connector

power
subrack (DC/
DC)/
PRESENT

RJ45
connector

UPEU or
UEIU/EXTALM1

7.5.5
Monitoring
Signal
Cable for
the Fan
Assembly

RJ45
connector

Fan
assembly/
COM IN

RJ45
connector

UPEU/
MON0

7.5.4 Fan
Assembly
Cascade
Signal
Cable

RJ45
connector

the upperlevel fan


box/
COM_OUT

RJ45
connector

the lowerlevel fan


box/
COM_IN

NOTE
Upper-level
fan box: the
fan box
directly
connected to
the BBU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

NOTE
Lower-level
fan box: the
fan box
connected to
the upperlevel fan box
and then to
the BBU.

188

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Item

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

GATM
Monitoring
Signal Cable

RJ45
connector

COM1 port
on the
GATM

RJ45
connector

MON1 port
on the UPEU
or MON0
port on the
UEIU

FMUGATM
Monitoring
Signal
Cable

RJ45
connector

COM2 port
on the
GATM

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
lower-level
fan box

7.5.14
Signal
Cable for
the ELU

RJ45
connector

ELU

RJ45
connector

Fan
assembly/
SENSOR

NOTE

a: The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption, and the USB port can be shut down using
commands. The USB commission port is used for commissioning the base station rather than configuring
and exporting information of the base station.

RF Cables
Table 7-5 lists the RF cables.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Table 7-5 RF Cables


Item

Cables to be
installed on
site

Cable

7.6.1 RF
Jumper

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installation
Position

DIN elbow
male
connector

RFU/
ANT_TX/
RXA and
ANT_RXB

DIN straight
male
connector

l Feeder of
the
antenna
system
(no
GATM
configure
d)
l ANT port
on the
Bias-Tee
(GATM
configure
d)

Cables
installed
before
delivery

7.6.2 InterRFU RF
Signal
Cable

QMA elbow
male
connector

RFU/
RX_OUTA

QMA elbow
male
connector

RFU/
RX_INB

7.2 Cable Connections


The power cables, transmission cables, CPRI cables, monitoring signal cables, and RF cables
in a cabinet must be connected on the basis of separate cable connection principles.

7.2.1 Power Cable Connections


This section describes the power cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC),
BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC), and BTS3900 cabinet (AC).

Power Cable Connections of the BTS3900 Cabinet (-48 V DC)


Figure 7-1 shows the power cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC). The power
distribution schemes of a single cabinet and two cabinets are the same.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-1 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC)

Table 7-6 lists the power cables of the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC).
Table 7-6 Power cables of the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC)
SN

Description

P1 to P6

For details, see 7.3.6 Power Cable for the RFU.

P7

For details, see 7.3.5 Power Cable for the Fan Assembly.

P8

For details, see 7.3.4 Power Cable for the BBU.

P11 and P12

For details, see 7.3.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet.

Power Cable Connections of the BTS3900 Cabinet (+24 V DC)


Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC). The power
distribution schemes of a single cabinet and two cabinets are the same.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-2 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC)

Table 7-7 lists the power cables of the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC).
Table 7-7 Power cables of the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC)
SN

Description

P1 to P6

For details, see 7.3.6 Power Cable for the RFU.

P7

For details, see 7.3.5 Power Cable for the Fan Assembly.

P8

For details, see 7.3.4 Power Cable for the BBU.

P11 and P12

For details, see 7.3.2 Power Cable for the DCDU-01.

P25 to P28

For details, see 7.3.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet.

Power Cable Connections of the BTS3900 Cabinet (AC)


The BTS3900 cabinet supports 220 V AC three-phase input, 220 V AC single-phase input, and
110 V AC dual-live-wire input. Following is based on 220 V AC single-phase input. The power
distribution schemes of a single cabinet and two cabinets are the same.
Figure 7-3 shows the power cable connections of the BTS3900 (220 V AC).

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-3 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet (220 V AC)

Table 7-8 lists the power cables of the BTS3900 cabinet (220 V AC).
Table 7-8 Power cables of the BTS3900 cabinet (220 V AC)
SN

Description

P1 to P6

For details, see 7.3.6 Power Cable for the RFU.

P7

For details, see 7.3.5 Power Cable for the Fan Assembly.

P8

For details, see 7.3.4 Power Cable for the BBU.

P11 and P12

For details, see 7.3.2 Power Cable for the DCDU-01.

P13

For details, see 7.3.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet.

7.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections


This section introduces the principle of connecting transmission cables with different
configuration.

Transmission Cable Connections for a Single-Mode Base Station


In GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or optical
cable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration principles
l
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Application Scenario
Table 7-9 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in
different transmission modes.
Table 7-9 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
Trans
missi
on
Mode

Mode
Supp
orted

Application Scenario

Legend

Trans
missio
n over
the E1
Cable

GSM
Only

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on
the GTMU.

"1" in the
Figure 7-4
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission


cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU
and UTRP.
UMTS
Only

Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmission


cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on
the WMPT or UMPT.

Trans
missio
n over
the FE
Cable

"2" in the
Figure 7-4
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

LTE
Only

The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable is


connected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT.

"3" in the
Figure 7-4
shows the cable
connections.

GSM
Only

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the UTRPc.

"4" in the
Figure 7-4
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port on the GTMU.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the GTMU.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Trans
missi
on
Mode

Mode
Supp
orted

Application Scenario

Legend

UMTS
Only

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the UTRPc.

"5" in the
Figure 7-4
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port on the UTRP2.
Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the UTRP9.
Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
LTE
Only

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the UTRPc.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.

"6" in the
Figure 7-4
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Figure 7-4 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-4 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

T1: 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable

T2: 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable -

Transmission Cable Connections for a Dual-Mode Base Station in Common


Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. This
section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration Principles
l

In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.

In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are


connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.

In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or
UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.

In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT
or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.

Application Scenario
Table 7-10 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Table 7-10 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Trans
missi
on
Mode

Mode
Supp
orted

Application Scenario

Legend

TDM
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n

GSM
+UMT
S

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on
the GTMU.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission
cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.

"1" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

IP
Over
E1/T1
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n

GSM
+UMT
S

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on
the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port
or optical port.

"2" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission


cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The
WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using
the electrical port or optical port.
GSM
+LTE

The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is


connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT
or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the
electrical port or optical port.

"3" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections.

UMTS
+LTE

The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is


connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT
or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT
using the electrical port or optical port.

"4" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Trans
missi
on
Mode

Mode
Supp
orted

IP over GSM
FE/GE +UMT
Comm S
on
Trans
missio
n

Application Scenario

Legend

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the UTRPc.

"5" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected to
the UTRP using the optical port.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.
Scenario 5: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The
WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU
through the backplane.

GSM
+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the UTRPc.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.

"6" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.
Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT
or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the
backplane.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Trans
missi
on
Mode

Mode
Supp
orted

Application Scenario

Legend

UMTS
+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the UTRPc.

"7" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The


transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the
electrical port.
Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the
optical port.
Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT
or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT
through the backplane.
Route
Backu
p
Mode
with IP
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n

GSM
+UMT
S

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to


the electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
GTMU using the optical port.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to
the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
GTMU using the electrical port.

GSM
+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to


the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
GTMU using the optical port.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to
the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
GTMU using the electrical port.

"8" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

"9" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 3: The transmission cables are connected to


the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
GTMU through the backplane.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Trans
missi
on
Mode

Mode
Supp
orted

Application Scenario

Legend

UMTS
+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to


the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the
optical port.

"10" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to


the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the
optical port.
Hybrid
Trans
missio
n

UMTS
+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to


the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE
optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or
UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using
the electrical port.

"11" in the
Figure 7-5
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to


the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or
UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using
the optical port.

Figure 7-5 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-5 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode

T1: 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable

T2: 7.4.4 Interconnection Cable


Between the FE Electrical Ports

T3: 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber


Optic Cable

T4: 7.4.5 Interconnection Cable


Between FE Optical Ports

T5: 7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Transmission Cable Connections for a Dual-Mode Base Station in Non-Common


Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. This
section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Application Scenario
Table 7-11 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.
Table 7-11 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common
transmission mode
Trans
missi
on
Mode

Mode
Supp
orted

Application Scenario

Legend

GSM
E1/T1
+UMT
S E1/
T1

GU

The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1


port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.

"1" in the
Figure 7-6
shows the cable
connections.

GSM
FE/GE
+UMT
S FE/
GE

GU

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to


the FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU.

"2" in the
Figure 7-6
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

GSM
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE

GL

Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to


the FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU.
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The
transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on
the GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on the
LMPT or UMPT.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side.
The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1
ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electrical
or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.

UMTS
FE/GE
+LTE
FE/GE

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

GL

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to


the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to
the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE
electrical port on the GTMU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

"3" in the
Figure 7-6
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

"4" in the
Figure 7-6
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

202

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Trans
missi
on
Mode

Mode
Supp
orted

Application Scenario

Legend

UMTS
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE

UL

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The


transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on
the WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electrical
port on the LMPT or UMPT.

"5" in the
Figure 7-6
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTS


side. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1
port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical
port on the LMPT or UMPT.
UMTS
FE/GE
+LTE
FE/GE

UL

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to


the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the
WMPT or UMPT.
Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to
the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE
electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.

"6" in the
Figure 7-6
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

Figure 7-6 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-6 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common
transmission mode

T1: 7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable

T3: 7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

T5: 7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable

Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station


This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.
l

In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.

In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.

The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.

Application Scenario
Table 7-12 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Table 7-12 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station


Triple-Mode Scenario

Mode Specification

Reference

GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1)


(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM


+UMTS mode and BBU 1
works in LTE only mode.

GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1)


(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE


mode and BBU 1 works in
UMTS only mode.

UO (BBU 0)+GL (BBU 1)


(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in UMTS only


mode and BBU 1 works in
GSM+LTE mode.

GO (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1)


(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM only


mode and BBU 1 works in
UMTS+LTE mode.

l Dual-mode includes
common and noncommon transmission.
For details, see the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a DualMode Base Station in
Common Transmission
Mode and the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a DualMode Base Station in
Non-Common
Transmission Mode.
l For details about the
transmission cable
connections for a singlemode base station, see the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a
Single-Mode Base
Station.

GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1)


(BBU Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM


+UMTS mode and BBU 1
works in LTE only mode.

For details, see the "1" or


"2" in the Figure 7-7

GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1)


(BBU Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE


mode and BBU 1 works in
UMTS only mode.

For details, see the "3" or


"4" in the Figure 7-7

GU (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1)


(BBU Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM


+UMTS mode and BBU 1
works in UMTS+LTE mode.

For details, see the "5" in the


Figure 7-7

Figure 7-7 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-7 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station

T1:7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

7.2.3 CPRI Cable Connections


The CPRI cables are connected in star or chain topology. In star topology, each RFU is connected
to the BBU separately. In chain topology, the RFUs are cascaded before connected to the BBU.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base Station


This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in GSM only mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-8 shows the cable connections in the following situation: The GRFU/DRFU with a
star topology work in dual-band mode serving three sectors.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-8 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-9 shows the cable connections in the following situation: The GRFU/DRFU work in
dual-band mode serving three sectors. A pair of two GRFUs/DRFUs working in the same sector
with different bands are cascaded.
Figure 7-9 CPRI cable connections (2)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode and serve three sectors. The GRFUs/DRFUs in
the same sector are cascaded. The RRU3004s/RRU3008s work in single-band mode, serve three
sectors, and are connected in the star topology. Figure 7-10 shows the CPRI cable connections
in this scenario.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables
NOTE

If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUs
working in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connected
to the UBRI.

Figure 7-10 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station


This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in UMTS only mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-11 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the WBBPb, the WRFUs work in single-band mode and do not support MIMO,
and the base station supports a maximum of three sectors.
Figure 7-11 CPRI cable connections (1)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-12 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the WBBPb, the WRFUs work in single-band mode and supports MIMO or
supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports a maximum of three sectors,
and two WRFUs work in the same sector are cascaded.
Figure 7-12 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-13 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the WBBPd, the WRFUs work in single-band mode and supports MIMO or
supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports a maximum of three sectors,
and two WRFUs work in the same sector are cascaded.
Figure 7-13 CPRI cable connections (3)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
The RFUs and RFUs work in single-band mode. The WRFUs serve three sectors, and support
MIMO configuration or support expanded bandwidth and carriers. The WRFUs in the same
sector are cascaded. The RRU3804s serve three sectors and are connected in the star topology.
Figure 7-14 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
Figure 7-14 CPRI cable connections (4)

CPRI Cable Connections for an LTE Only Base Station


This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in LTE only mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a LTE Only Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-15 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The LRFUs work in
single-band mode, use 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and the base station
supports a maximum of three sectors.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-15 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-16 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The LRFUs work in
single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 4T4R MIMO, and each pair of RFUs serve
one sector.
Figure 7-16 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-17 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The LRFUs work in
single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, support 4T4R MIMO, and each pair of RFUs serve
one sector.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-17 CPRI cable connections (3)

Figure 7-18 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The MRFUs work in
single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and each pair of MRFUs serve
one sector.
Figure 7-18 CPRI cable connections (4)

CPRI Cable Connections for a LTE Only Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
The LRFUs work in single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 4T4R MIMO. The
LRFUs serve three sectors, and each pair of LRFUs serve one sector. The RRU3221s work in
single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO. The RRU3221s serve
three sectors.
Figure 7-19 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-19 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station


This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in GSM+UMTS mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-20 shows the CPRI cable connections when the MRFUs with a dual-star topology work
in single-band mode and support three sectors.
Figure 7-20 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-21 shows the CPRI cable connections when the MRFUs with a dual-star topology work
in single-band mode and support MIMO and three sectors.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-21 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-22 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The DRFUs/GRFUs
with a star topology work in single-band mode, and serve six sectors. WRFUs work in singleband mode, support three sectors and two WRFUs in the same sector are cascaded.
Figure 7-22 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
NOTE

If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUs
working in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connected
to the UBRI.

Figure 7-23 shows the CPRI cable connections when a GU base station is configured with RFUs
and RRUs and meets the following conditions:
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode and serve three sectors. Two GRFUs/
DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded.

The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the
dual-star topology.

Figure 7-23 CPRI cable connections (4)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station


This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in GSM+LTE mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-24 shows the CPRI cable connections when the MRFUs with a dual-star topology work
in single-band mode and support three sectors.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-24 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-25 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The DRFUs/GRFUs
work in single-band mode and two pairs of DRFUs/GRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. The
LRFUs with a star topology work in single-band mode, support three sectors and 2T2R MIMO.
Figure 7-25 CPRI cable connections (2)

CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
Figure 7-26 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode, and serve three sectors. The GRFUs/
DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded.

The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the
dual-star topology.
NOTE

If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUs
working in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connected
to the UBRI.

Figure 7-26 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS+LTE Base Station


This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a base station in UMTS+LTE mode.

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS+LTE Base Station which is configured with
only RFUs
Figure 7-27 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The WRFUs work in
single-band mode, support a maximum of three sectors, and do not support MIMO. The LRFUs
with a star topology work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R
MIMO.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-27 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-28 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The WRFUs work in
single-band mode, support a maximum of three sectors, and support MIMO. Three LRFUs with
a star topology in the secondary cabinet work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, and
support three sectors and 2T2R MIMO.
Figure 7-28 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 7-29 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The WRFUs work in
single-band mode and supports MIMO or supports expanded bandwidth and carriers. The
LRFUs with a star topology work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R
MIMO, and each pair of RFUs serve one sector.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-29 CPRI cable connections (3)

CPRI Cable Connections for a UMTS+LTE Base Station which is configured with
RFUs and RRUs
Figure 7-30 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
l

The WRFUs work in dual-band mode. Both the WRFUs working in the high frequency
band and the WRFUs working in the low frequency band serve three sectors. The WRFUs
are connected in the star topology.

The RRU3221s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth,
support 2T2R MIMO, and are connected in the star topology.

Figure 7-30 CPRI cable connections (4)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station


This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
A triple-mode base station solution can support the following six scenarios: GU+LO (BBUs not
interconnected), GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected), UO+GL (BBUs not interconnected), and
GU+L (UCIU+UMPT).
A single baseband unit (BBU) can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs are required
for a Triple-mode base station.
NOTE

If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUs
working in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connected
to the UBRI.

GU+LO (BBUs not Interconnected)


In the GU+LO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. CPRI
Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in
this scenario.
In the GU+LO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 1 works in LTE only mode. CPRI
Cable Connections for an LTE Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this
scenario.

GL+UO (BBUs not Interconnected)


In the GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRI
Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this
scenario.
In the GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 1 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI
Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this
scenario.

UO+GL (BBUs not Interconnected)


In the GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 0 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI
Cable Connections for a UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this
scenario.
In the GL+UO (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU 1 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRI
Cable Connections for a GSM+LTE Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this
scenario.

GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)
In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario where the base station is configured with only RFUs,
BBU 0 and BBU 1 are interconnected by UCIU and UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS, and
LTE modes. Figure 7-31 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-31 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario(1)

In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario where the base station is configured with RFUs and
RRUs, BBU 0 and BBU 1 are interconnected by UCIU and UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS,
and LTE modes. Figure 7-32 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
Figure 7-32 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario(2)

7.2.4 RF Cable Connections


This section describes the RF cable connections for various types of RF modules.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

RF Cable Connections for DRFUs


The DRFU supports two carriers.
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for DRFUs with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 1T2R Mode


With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

One DRFU

Figure 7-33 describes the RF cable connections.


Figure 7-33 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

One DRFU

Figure 7-33 shows the RF cable connections.


With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for four carriers:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

Two DRFUs

Figure 7-34 describes the RF cable connections.


Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-34 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode


With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

One DRFU

Figure 7-33 shows the RF cable connections.


With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

Two DRFUs

Figure 7-34 shows the RF cable connections.

RF Cable Connections for GRFUs


The GRFU supports six carriers.
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for GRFUs with a single sector.
The GRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.

Cable Connections with Three Carriers


The following items are configured for three carriers:
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

One GRFU

Figure 7-35 describes the RF cable connections.


Figure 7-35 Cable connections with three carriers

Cable Connections with Nine Carriers


The following items are configured for nine carriers:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

Two GRFUs

Figure 7-36 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-36 Cable Connections with Nine Carriers

Cable Connections with 14 Carriers


The following items are configured for 14 carriers:
l

Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas

Three GRFUs

Figure 7-37 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-37 Cable connections with 14 carriers

Cable Connections with 24 Carriers


The following items are configured for 24 carriers:
l

Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas

Four GRFUs

Figure 7-38 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-38 Cable connections with 24 carriers

RF Cable Connections for WRFUs


The WRFU supports four carriers.
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUs with a single sector.

Cable Connections in 1T2R Mode


With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

One WRFU

Figure 7-39 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-39 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eight
carriers:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

Two WRFUs

Figure 7-40 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-40 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)

Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode


With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

Two WRFUs

Figure 7-40 shows the RF cable connections.

Cable Connections in 2T4R Mode


With two TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four
carriers:
l

Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas

Two WRFUs

Figure 7-41 describes the RF cable connections.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-41 Cable connections in 2T4R mode

Cable Connections in 2x2 MIMO Mode


The base station in UMTS only mode supports 2x2 MIMO. Figure 7-40 shows the cable
connections.

RF Cable Connections for the WRFUa


RF cable connections for the WRFUa vary according to the positions of the WRFUa and antenna.

Cable Connections
This section describes the RF cable connections for the WRFUa with a single sector. The
following table lists the RF cable connections for the WRFUa.
Table 7-13 RF cable connections for the WRFUa

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

RFU
Model

Specifications of a
Single RFU

Description

Illustration

WRFUa

Four carriers with 1T2R

Four carriers with 1T2R

See illustration 1 in
Figure 7-42.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

RFU
Model

Specifications of a
Single RFU

Description

Illustration

l Four carriers with


2T2R

See illustration 2 in
Figure 7-42.

l Eight carriers with


1T2R
l 2x2 MIMO
Four carriers with 2T4R

See illustration 3 in
Figure 7-42.

Illustration of Cable Connections


Figure 7-42 RF cable connections for the WRFUa

RF Cable Connections for LRFUs


The LRFU supports a single carrier.
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for LRFUs supporting a single
sector.
The LRFU supports only the 2T2R configuration.

RF Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode


In 2T2R mode, the following items are configured:
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

A dual-polarized antenna

An LRFU

Figure 7-43 shows RF cable connections.


Figure 7-43 RF cable connections in 2T2R mode

RF Cable Connections in 4T4R mode


In 4T4R mode, the following items are configured:
l

Two dual-polarized antennas

Two LRFUs

Figure 7-44 shows RF cable connections.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-44 RF cable connections in 4T4R mode

RF Cable Connections for MRFUs


The MRFU supports six carriers.
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUs with a single sector.
The MRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.

RF Cable Connections in G4U2 Mode


When the GSM system is configured with four carriers and the UMTS system is configured with
two carriers, the following items are required:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

One MRFU

Figure 7-45 shows the RF cable connections in G4U2 mode.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-45 RF cable connections in G4U2 mode

RF Cable Connections in G6U2 Mode


When the GSM system is configured with six carriers and the UMTS system is configured with
two carriers, the following items are required:
l

A pair of dual-polarized antennas

Two MRFUs

Figure 7-46 shows the RF cable connections in G6U2 mode.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-46 RF cable connections in G6U2 mode

RF Cable Connections in Single-mode Scenarios


In GSM only mode, a single MRFU supports a maximum of six carriers. Figure 7-45 shows the
corresponding RF cable connections.
In UMTS only mode, a single MRFU supports a maximum of four carriers. Figure 7-45 shows
the corresponding RF cable connections.

RF Cable Connections for Mixed RFU Configuration


In the capacity expansion scenario, mixed RFU configuration can be used to expand the system
capacity or support multiple radio access technologies (RATs). Mixed RFU configuration means
that different types of RFUs are configured in the same base station. This section uses some
examples to describe the RF cable connections for mixed RFU configuration.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Description of Cable Connections


Table 7-14 Description of RF cable connections for mixed RFU configuration

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Initial Scenario

Mixed Configuration
Scenario

Illustration of Cable
Connections

In UMTS 3x2 mode, each


sector is configured with one
WRFU of 40 W. This WRFU
supports two UMTS carriers.

To support the UMTS 3x6


mode, one WRFU of 80 W is
added to each sector. This
WRFU supports four UMTS
carriers.

See part 1 in Figure 7-47.

In GSM S4/4/4 mode, each


sector is configured with one
MRFU V1. Each MRFU V1
supports four GSM carriers.

To support 3x5MHz of LTE,


one MRFU V2 is added to
each sector. The MRFU V2
supports one LTE carrier.

See part 2 in Figure 7-47.

In GSM S4/4/4 mode, each


sector is configured with one
GRFU V2 (1800 MHz). Each
GRFU V2 (1800 MHz)
supports four GSM carriers.

To support the GSM S8/8/8


mode, one MRFU (1800
MHz) is added to each sector.
Each MRFU (1800 MHz)
supports six GSM carriers.

See part 3 in Figure 7-47.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Illustration of Cable Connections


Figure 7-47 RF cable connections for mixed RFU configuration

7.2.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections


Two BBUs in a triple-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the mode supporting
capability, two BBUs in a single-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the service
processing capability of a single mode.
NOTE

When two BBUs in a base station are cascaded to achieve the GUL triple-mode, BBU0 is the root BBU,
and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.

UCIU+UMPT
In a triple-mode base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 to
achieve the GUL triple-mode. In a UMTS only base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected
to the UMPT in BBU1 to expand the UMTS service processing capacity. Any port from M0 to
M4 on the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU1, as shown
in Figure 7-48.
NOTE

In UCIU+UMPT mode, the UMPT must be configured as the main control board of BBU1. Table 7-15
lists the BBU configurations in UCIU+UMPT mode.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Table 7-15 BBU configurations


Scenario Description

BBU0

BBU1

Triple-Mode Scenario

GU

GL

GU

UL

Single-Mode Scenario

Figure 7-48 Signal cable connection between the UCIU and the UMPT

WBBPf+WBBPf
In the UCIU+UMPT mode, the WBBPfs in the two BBUs can be connected to transmit baseband
data. As shown in Figure 7-48, the HEI ports on the WBBPfs in BBU0 and BBU1 are connected.
NOTE

In SRAN7.0, only the WBBPf in slot 2 or 3 of a BBU can be connected to the WBBPf in another BBU.

Figure 7-49 Signal cable connection between the WBBPfs

7.2.6 Signal Cable Connections


This section describes the signal cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables
NOTE

l If any of the following devices is not configured at the site, ignore the device and its cable connections.
l In triple-mode scenarios where two BBUs are configured, all the monitoring equipment is connected
to only BBU 0. The monitoring principles for the triple-mode scenarios are the same as those for the
single-mode or dual-mode scenarios.

Signal Cable Connections of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) Cabinet


The signal cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC) are shown in Figure 7-50 and
the signal cables are listed in Table 7-16.
Figure 7-50 Signal cable connections of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) Cabinet

Table 7-16 Signal cables of the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

SN

Description

S1 and S2

For details, see 7.5.14 Signal Cable for the ELU.

S3

For details, see 7.5.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


Fan Assembly.

S4

For details, see 7.5.4 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal


Cable.

S5

For details, see 7.5.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


EMU.

S6 and S7

For details, see 7.5.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


GATM.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Signal Cable Connections of the BTS3900 DC (+24 V) cabinet


The signal cable connections of the BTS3900 DC (+24 V) cabinet are shown in Figure 7-51
and the signal cables are listed in Table 7-17.
Figure 7-51 Signal cable connections of the BTS3900 DC (+24 V) cabinet

Table 7-17 Signal cables of the BTS3900 DC (+24 V) cabinet

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

SN

Description

S1 and S2

For details, see 7.5.14 Signal Cable for the ELU.

S3

For details, see 7.5.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


Fan Assembly.

S4

For details, see 7.5.4 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal


Cable.

S5

For details, see 7.5.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


EMU.

S6 and S7

For details, see 7.5.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


GATM.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

SN

Description

S8

For details, see 7.5.3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


PSU (DC/DC).

S9 and S10

For details, see 7.5.2 In-Position Signal Cable for the


PSU (DC/DC).

Signal Cable Connections of the BTS3900 AC Cabinet


The signal cable connections of the BTS3900 AC cabinet are shown in Figure 7-52 and the
signal cables are listed in Table 7-18.
Figure 7-52 Signal cable connections of the BTS3900 AC Cabinet

Table 7-18 Signal cables of the BTS3900 AC Cabinet

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

SN

Description

S1 and S2

For details, see 7.5.14 Signal Cable for the ELU.

S3

For details, see 7.5.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


Fan Assembly.

S4

For details, see 7.5.4 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal


Cable.

S5 and S6

For details, see 7.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


PMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

SN

Description

S7

For details, see 7.5.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


EMU.

S8 and S9

For details, see 7.5.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the


GATM.

7.3 BTS3900 Power Cable


The BTS3900 power cables consist of the cables leading power to the BTS3900 cabinet,
BBU3900, DCDU-01, fan box, RFU, and transmission equipment.

7.3.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet


The input power cable for the cabinet feeds DC or AC power into the cabinet. The maximum
length of an input power cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).

-48 V Power Cable


The -48 V power cable feeds -48 V power into the cabinet. Figure 7-53 shows the -48 V power
cable. Table 7-19 describes the -48 V power cable.
Figure 7-53 -48 V power cable

(1) OT terminal

Table 7-19 -48 V power cable


Cable

Color

Cross-Sectional
Area

OT Aperture

-48 V power cable

Blue

16 mm2

M6

Black

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

+24 V Power Cable


The +24 V power cable feeds +24 V power into the cabinet. Figure 7-54 shows the +24 V power
cable. Table 7-20 describes the +24 V power cable.
Figure 7-54 +24 V power cable

(1) OT terminal

Table 7-20 +24 V power cable


Cable

Color

Cross-Sectional
Area

OT Aperture

+24 V power cable

Red

25 mm2

M6

Black

AC Power Cable
The BTS3900 cabinet supports three types of AC power supply. That is, the 220 V AC singlephase, 220 V AC three-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. The AC power cable feeds AC
power into a cabinet. Figure 7-55 shows the AC power cable. Table 7-21 describes the AC
power cable.
Figure 7-55 AC power cable (220 V AC, single-phase)

(1) OT terminal

NOTE

Different types of 220 V power cable have different exteriors and consist of different numbers of wires.
Figure 7-55 shows the 220 V AC single-phase power cable.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Table 7-21 220 V power cable


Cable

Wire

Cross-Sectional
Area

OT Aperture

220 V AC threephase power cable

L1 wire

2.5 mm2

M6

L2 wire
L3 wire
N wire

220 V AC singlephase power cable

L wire

110 V dual-livewire power cable

L1 wire

6 mm2

N wire
6 mm2

L2 wire

NOTE

The colors and exteriors of cables delivered by Huawei vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with the local rules and regulations.

7.3.2 Power Cable for the DCDU-01


The power equipment (DC/DC) and power equipment (AC/DC) provide -48 V DC power to the
DCDU-01 through the DCDU-01 power cable.

Exterior
Figure 7-56 shows the power cable for the DCDU-01.
Figure 7-56 Power cable for the DCDU-01

(1) OT terminal

Cable Description
Table 7-22 describes the power cable for the DCDU-01.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Table 7-22 Power cable for the DCDU-01


Power Equipment

Cable Color

Cross-Sectional Area

OT Aperture

Power equipment
(DC/DC)

Blue

16 mm2

M6

Power equipment
(AC/DC)

Blue

16 mm2

M6

Black

Black

7.3.3 DCDU-03B Power Cable


A DCDU-03B power cable feeds DC power into a DCDU-03B from power equipment. This
section describes the specifications of DCDU-03B power cables when a DCDU-03B is
configured in different cabinets. The maximum length of a DCDU-03B power cable is 10 m
(32.80 ft).

Exterior
The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-03B power cable.
Figure 7-57 Cable exterior

(1) OT terminal (M6)

NOTE

In the preceding figure, the RTN(+) wire and NEG(-) wire in a DCDU-03B power cable are black and blue,
respectively.

Description
The following table lists the specifications of DCDU-03B power cables when a DCDU-03B is
configured in different cabinets.
NOTE

When the BTS3900AL is configured with RFUs and RRUs together, a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B
is used. No power cable is needed for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B, which is connected to power
supply using a BusBar (in an AC cabinet) or a DC junction box (in a DC cabinet).

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Table 7-23 Description


Cabinet Type

Power Equipment

Cable Specifications

BTS3900 (Ver.B) in DC scenarios


(the DCDU-03B is installed on a
wall)

External power
equipment

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), one


group

External power
equipment

4 mm2 (0.006 in.2), one


group

BTS3900L (Ver.B) (the


DCDU-03B is installed on a wall)
DBS3900 where the BBU is
installed on a wall, 19-inch rack, or
IMB03
OMB
TMC11H (Ver.B) serving as a
power cabinet in DC scenarios

7.3.4 Power Cable for the BBU


The DCDU-01 feeds -48 V DC power into the BBU through the power cable for the BBU.

Exterior
Figure 7-58 shows the power cable for the BBU.
Figure 7-58 Power cable for the BBU

(1) 3V3 power connector

(2) Parallel terminal

Pin Assignment
Table 7-24 describes the pin assignment of the power cable for the BBU.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Table 7-24 Pin assignment of the power cable for the BBU
Cable

X1 End

X2 End

Cable Color

W1

A3

B1

Black

W2

A1

B2

Blue

7.3.5 Power Cable for the Fan Assembly


The DCDU-01 feeds -48 V DC power into the fan assembly through the power cable for the fan
assembly.

Exterior
Figure 7-59 shows the power cable for the fan assembly.
Figure 7-59 Power cable for the fan assembly

(2) Parallel terminal

(1) 3V3 power connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-25 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the fan assembly.
Table 7-25 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the fan assembly
Cable

X1 End

X2 End

Cable Color

W1

A3

B1

Black

W2

A1

B2

Blue

7.3.6 Power Cable for the RFU


The DCDU-01 feeds -48 V DC power into the RFU through the power cable for the RFU.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Exterior
Figure 7-60 shows the power cable for the RFU.
Figure 7-60 Power cable for the RFU

(1) 3V3 power connector

(2) Parallel terminal

Pin Assignment
Table 7-26 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the RFU.
Table 7-26 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the RFU
Cable

X1 End

X2 End

Cable Color

W1

A3

B1

Black

W2

A1

B2

Blue

7.3.7 RRU Power Cables


RRU power cables feed power into RRUs. This section describes the specifications of RRU
power cables when different power devices are used.

Exterior
The following figure shows the exteriors of RRU power cables. Cable connectors at RRU sides
vary depending on RRU models. For details about cable connectors, see the related RRU
installation guide.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-61 Exteriors of RRU power cables

(1) Tool-less female


(2) EPC4 connector (3) EPC5 connector (4) OT terminal
connector (pressfit type)
(M4)

(5) Cord end


terminal

NOTE

l The colors of RRU power cables vary depending on regions.


l In most regions, the RTN(+) wire is black, and the NEG(-) wire is blue, as shown in the preceding figure.
l In other regions, the RTN(+) wire is brown, and the NEG(-) wire is gray.
l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are purchased locally,
the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Type
RRU power cables vary depending on power devices. The following table describes different
types of RRU power cables.
Table 7-27 Types of RRU power cables
Exterior of an RRU
Power Cable

Cabinet Type

Power Device

Cable
Specifications

Illustration 1

TMC11H (Ver.C)

DCDU-11B

APM30H (Ver.B)

EPS 01A/01C and


EPS 01B/01D

APM30H (Ver.C)

EPU03A-02/04 and
EPU03A-03/05

TMC11H (Ver.D)

DCDU-12B providing
LOAD6 to LOAD9
ports

OMB (Ver.C)

PDU10D-01
providing LOAD6 to
LOAD9 ports

The specifications
of RRU power
cables vary
depending on
RRU models. For
details about the
specifications of
RRU power
cables, see the
RRU hardware
description and
RRU installation
guide.

APM30H (Ver.D)

EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04

TMC11H (Ver.D)

PDU10D-01
providing LOAD0 to
LOAD5 ports

OMB (Ver.C)

DCDU-12B providing
LOAD0 to LOAD5
ports

APM30H (Ver.D)

EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
providing RRU0 to
RRU5 ports

Illustration 4

TMC11H (Ver.B)

DCDU-03B

Illustration 5

APM30H (Ver.D)

ODM06D

Illustration 2

Illustration 3

7.3.8 Power Cable for the GATM


The power cable for the GATM feeds -48 V DC power into the GATM.

Structure
One end of the power cable for the GATM is a 3V3 power connector, and the other end is a toolless female power connector (pressfit type), as shown in Figure 7-62.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-62 Power cable for the GATM

(1) 3V3 power connector

(2) tool-less female power connector (pressfit type)

Pin Assignment
Table 7-28 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the GATM.
Table 7-28 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the GATM
Wire

X1 End

X2 End

Wire Color

W1

X1.A1

X2.B2

Blue

W2

X1.A3

X2.B1

Black

7.4 BTS3900 Transmission Cable


The BTS3900 transmission cable includes E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable,
Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports, and Interconnection Cable Between the
FE Optical Ports.

7.4.1 E1/T1 Cable


An E1/T1 cable transmits baseband signals from BBU to the external transmission equipment.
The maximum length of a E1/T1 cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).

Exterior
The E1/T1 cable is of three types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable, 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable, and
100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable.
One end of the E1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cable
is prepared on site based on site requirements. Figure 7-63 shows an E1/T1 cable.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-63 E1/T1 signal cable

(1) DB26 male connector

Table 7-29 lists different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables.


Table 7-29 Different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables
Cable

One End

The Other End

75 ohm E1 coaxial cable

DB26 male connector

L9 male connector
L9 female connector
SMB female connector
BNC male connector
SMZ male connector
SMZ female connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-30, Table 7-31, and Table 7-32 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1
cable.
Table 7-30 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Pin on the DB26


Male Connector

Type(1)

Coaxial Unit No.

Wire Label

X1.1

Tip

RX1+

X1.2

Ring

X1.3

Tip

X1.4

Ring

X1.5

Tip

X1.6

Ring

RX13

RX2+
RX2-

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RX3+
RX3252

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Pin on the DB26


Male Connector

Type(1)

Coaxial Unit No.

Wire Label

X1.7

Tip

RX4+

X1.8

Ring

X1.19

Tip

X1.20

Ring

X1.21

Tip

X1.22

Ring

X1.23

Tip

X1.24

Ring

X1.25

Tip

X1.26

Ring

RX42

TX1+
TX1-

TX2+
TX2-

TX3+
TX3-

TX4+
TX4-

NOTE

(1) "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.

Table 7-31 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Pin on the DB26


Male Connector

Wire Color

Wire Type

Wire Label

X.1

Blue

Twisted pair

RX1+

X.2

White

X.3

Orange

X.4

White

X.5

Green

X.6

White

X.7

Brown

X.8

White

X.19

Gray

X.20

White

X.21

Blue

X.22

Red

X.23

Orange

RX1Twisted pair

RX2+
RX2-

Twisted pair

RX3+
RX3-

Twisted pair

RX4+
RX4-

Twisted pair

TX1+
TX1-

Twisted pair

TX2+
TX2-

Twisted pair

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

TX3+
253

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Pin on the DB26


Male Connector

Wire Color

X.24

Red

X.25

Green

X.26

Red

Wire Type

Wire Label
TX3-

Twisted pair

TX4+
TX4-

Table 7-32 Pin assignment for the wires of the 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable
Pin on the DB26
Male Connector

Wire Color

Wire Type

Wire Label

X.1

Blue and white

Twisted pair

RX1+

X.2

White and blue

X.3

Orange and white

X.4

White and orange

X.5

Green and white

X.6

White and green

X.7

Brown and white

X.8

White and brown

X.19

Gray and white

X.20

White and gray

X.21

Blue and red

X.22

Red and blue

X.23

Orange and red

X.24

Red and orange

X.25

Green and red

X.26

Red and green

RX1Twisted pair

RX2+
RX2-

Twisted pair

RX3+
RX3-

Twisted pair

RX4+
RX4-

Twisted pair

TX1+
TX1-

Twisted pair

TX2+
TX2-

Twisted pair

TX3+
TX3-

Twisted pair

TX4+
TX4-

7.4.2 FE/GE Ethernet Cable


The FE/GE Ethernet cable connects the BBU to the external transmission equipment through
routing equipment and transmits baseband signals. The maximum length of an FE/GE Ethernet
cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Exterior
The FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable, which has an RJ45 connector at
each end. Figure 7-64 shows an FE/GE Ethernet cable.
Figure 7-64 FE/GE Ethernet cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-33 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE Ethernet cable.
Table 7-33 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE Ethernet cable
Pin on the RJ45
Connector

Wire Color

Wire Type

Pin on the RJ45 Connector

X1.2

Orange

Twisted pair

X2.2

X1.1

White and
orange

X1.6

Green

X1.3

White and
green

X1.4

Blue

X1.5

White and blue

X1.8

Brown

X1.7

White and
brown

X2.1
Twisted pair

X2.6
X2.3

Twisted pair

X2.4
X2.5

Twisted pair

X2.8
X2.7

7.4.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable


An FE/GE fiber optic cable transmits optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission
equipment. This cable is optional. The maximum length of an FE/GE fiber optic cable is 20 m
(65.62 ft).
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Exterior
The FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,
or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-65, Figure 7-66, Figure 7-67.
Figure 7-65 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the FC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-66 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the SC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-67 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the LC connectors)

NOTICE
To connect a BBU3900 and a transmission device by using FE/GE optical fiber patch cords,
adhere to the following rules:
l

The TX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the RX port on the transmission
equipment.

The RX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the TX port on the transmission
equipment.

7.4.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports


This cable connects the FE electrical ports on two main control boards to enable IP-based cotransmission.

Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end,
as shown in Figure 7-68.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-68 Interconnection cable between FE electrical ports

(1) RJ45 connector

7.4.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports


This cable connects the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT to achieve co-transmission
in IP mode.

Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as
shown in Figure 7-69.
Figure 7-69 Interconnection cable between FE optical ports

(1) LC connector

7.5 BTS3900 Signal Cable


This chapter describes the functions of signal cables of BTS3900.

7.5.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU


The monitoring signal cable for the PMU transmits the environment alarm information collected
by the PMU to the BBU.

Exterior
Figure 7-70 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PMU.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-70 Monitoring signal cable for the PMU

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-34 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the
PMU.
Table 7-34 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PMU
X1 End

X2 End

Wire Color

Wire Type

X1.1

X2.1

White

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.3

X2.3

White

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.5

X2.5

White

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

7.5.2 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)


The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position
status of the PSU.

Exterior
Figure 7-71 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-71 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-35 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC).
Table 7-35 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End

X2 End

Wire Color

Wire Type

X1.1

X2.1

White

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.3

X2.3

White

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.5

X2.5

White

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

7.5.3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)


The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power
status of the PSUs and receive related alarms.

Exterior
Figure 7-72 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-72 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

(1) RJ45 connector

(2) Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

7.5.4 Fan Assembly Cascade Signal Cable


Fan assembly cascade signal cable is used to connect two fan assemblies.

Exterior
Figure 7-73 shows the fan assembly cascade signal cable.
Figure 7-73 fan assembly cascade signal cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-36 describes the pin assignment of the fan assembly cascade signal cable.
Table 7-36 Pin assignment of the fan assembly cascade signal cable

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

X1 End

X2 End

Color

Type

X1.1

X2.1

White

Twisted pair cable

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.3

X2.3

White

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.5

X2.5

White

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Twisted pair cable

Twisted pair cable

260

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

X1 End

X2 End

Color

Type

X1.7

X2.7

White

Twisted pair cable

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

7.5.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Assembly


The monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly is used for the BBU to monitor the running
status of the fan assembly.

Exterior
Figure 7-74 shows the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly.
Figure 7-74 Monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-37 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the fan
assembly.
Table 7-37 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

X1 End

X2 End

Color

Type

X1.1

X2.1

White

Twisted pair cable

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.3

X2.3

White

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.5

X2.5

White

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Twisted pair cable

Twisted pair cable

Twisted pair cable

261

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

7.5.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU


The monitoring signal cable for the EMU transmits monitoring signals from the EMU to the
BBU.

Exterior
Figure 7-75 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMU.
Figure 7-75 Monitoring signal cable for the EMU

(2) DB9 male connector

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-38 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the
EMU.
Table 7-38 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMU
Pin on the
RJ45
Connector

Pin on the DB9


Male Connector

Wire Color

Wire Type

Label

X1.1

X2.3

White

Twisted pair

TX+

X1.2

X2.7

Orange

X1.5

X2.6

White

X1.4

X2.2

Blue

TXTwisted pair

RXRX+

7.5.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATM


This cable connects the BBU and GATM, enabling the BBU to transmit control signals to the
GATM and enabling the GATM to report alarms to the BBU.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Structure
Figure 7-76 shows the monitoring signal cable for the GATM.
Figure 7-76 Monitoring signal cable for the GATM

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-39 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the
GATM.
Table 7-39 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the GATM
X1 End

X2 End

Wire Color

Wire Type

X1.1

X2.1

White

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.3

X2.3

White

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.5

X2.5

White

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

7.5.8 FMU-GATM Monitoring Signal Cable


A FMU-GATM monitoring signal cable connects the GATM and the FMU in fan assembly. It
transmits monitoring signals collected by the FMU to the GATM.

Exterior
The following figure shows the exterior of a FMU-GATM monitoring signal cable.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-77 Exterior of a FMU-GATM monitoring signal cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Description
The following table describes a FMU-GATM monitoring signal cable.
Table 7-40 FMU-GATM monitoring signal cable
X1 End

X2 End

Color

Wire Type

X1.1

X2.1

White

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.3

X2.3

White

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.5

X2.5

White

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

7.5.9 RET Control Signal Cable


The RET control signal cable is used to connect the GATM and the Bias-Tee, enabling the
GATM to supply power to the TMA and to control the RET antenna.

Exterior
Figure 7-78 shows the exterior of a RET control signal cable.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-78 Exterior of a RET control signal cable

(1) SMA elbow male connector

(2) SMA straight male connector

7.5.10 BBU interconnection signal cable


The BBU interconnection signal cable connects BBU0 and BBU1 to forward information
between the BBUs.

Cable Type
BBU interconnection signal cables are classified into different types based on their functions,
as listed in Table 7-41.
Table 7-41 Cable type
Cable

Function

Installation Position

BBU interconnection signal


cable

Forwards control and


synchronization information
from one BBU to another

Connects the UMPT and the


UCIU

Forwards baseband
information from one BBU to
another

Interconnects two WBBPf


boards

Exterior
l

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting UCIU to UMPT forwards control and
synchronization information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in
the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure
7-79. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable
is 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-80.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-79 BBU interconnection signal cable (1)

(1) DLC connector

(2) Breakout cable

Figure 7-80 BBU interconnection signal cable (2)

(1) DLC connector

(2) Armoured cable

(3) Breakout cable

The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting WBBPf to WBBPf forwards baseband
information from one BBU to another, as shown in Figure 7-81. When two BBUs are
installed in the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long. When
two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 10 meters
long.
Figure 7-81 BBU interconnection signal cable (3)

(1) QSFP connector

(2) QSFP connector

7.5.11 BBU Alarm Cable


A BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU. The
maximum length of a BBU alarm cable is 20 m (65.62 ft).

Exterior
The BBU alarm cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-82. One RJ45
connector at one end, however, may be removed and an appropriate terminal may be added
according to the field requirements.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-82 BBU alarm cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-42 shows the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable.
Table 7-42 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable
BBU
Alarm
Port

Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r

Wire
Color

Wire
Type

Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r

Description

EXTALM1

X1.1

White and
orange

Twisted
pair

X2.1

Boolean input 4+

X1.2

Orange

X2.2

Boolean input 4- (GND)

X1.3

White and
green

X2.3

Boolean input 5+

X1.6

Green

X2.6

Boolean input 5- (GND)

X1.5

White and
blue

X2.5

Boolean input 6+

X1.4

Blue

X2.4

Boolean input 6- (GND)

X1.7

White and
brown

X2.7

Boolean input 7+

X1.8

Brown

X2.8

Boolean input 7- (GND)

X1.1

White and
orange

X2.1

Boolean input 0+

X1.2

Orange

X2.2

Boolean input 0+
(GND)

X1.3

White and
green

X2.3

Boolean input 1+

X1.6

Green

X2.6

Boolean input 1- (GND)

X1.5

White and
blue

X2.5

Boolean input 2+

EXTALM0

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Twisted
pair

Twisted
pair

Twisted
pair

Twisted
pair

Twisted
pair

Twisted
pair

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

BBU
Alarm
Port

Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r

Wire
Color

X1.4

Blue

X1.7

White and
brown

X1.8

Brown

Wire
Type

Twisted
pair

Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r

Description

X2.4

Boolean input 2- (GND)

X2.7

Boolean input 3+

X2.8

Boolean input 3- (GND)

7.5.12 GPS Clock Signal Cable


The GPS clock signal cable is used to transmit GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system
to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU. This cable is
optional.

Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-83.
Figure 7-83 GPS clock signal cable

(1) SMA male connector

(2) N-type female connector

7.5.13 GPS Jumper


This section describes a GPS jumper that is used when a GPS surge protector is installed in a
cabinet. The maximum length of a GPS jumper is 100 m (328.08 ft).

Exterior
There are N50 straight male connectors at both ends of a GPS jumper, which connects the GPS
surge protector and GPS antenna. Figure 7-84 shows a GPS jumper.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-84 GPS jumper

(1) N50 straight male connector

7.5.14 Signal Cable for the ELU


The signal cable for the ELU is used to report the cabinet type information detected by the ELU
to the fan assembly.

Exterior
Figure 7-85 shows the signal cable for the ELU.
Figure 7-85 Signal cable for the ELU

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-43 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the signal cable for the ELU.
Table 7-43 Pin assignment for the wires of the signal cable for the ELU

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

X1 End

X2 End

Wire Color

Wire Type

X1.1

X2.1

White

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.3

X2.3

White

X1.6

X2.6

Green

X1.5

X2.5

White

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

269

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

7.5.15 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance


An adapter used for local maintenance connects the USB port on the UMPT to an Ethernet cable
during local maintenance.

Exterior
The adapter used for local maintenance has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernet
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-86.
Figure 7-86 Adapter used for local maintenance

(2) Ethernet connector

(1) USB connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-44 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance.
Table 7-44 Pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance
Pin of the USB
Connector

Wire Color

Wire Type

Pin of the Ethernet


Connector

X1.9

Blue

Twisted pair

X2.1

X1.8

White

X1.6

Orange

X1.5

White

X1.Shell

X2.2
Twisted pair

X2.3
X2.6

Shield

X2.Shell

7.5.16 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations


When a 3012 series base station and a 3900 series base station are installed side-by-side, the
cable between two combined base stations is used to connect the universal cascading interface
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

unit (UCIU) in the 3900 series base station and the cabinet top backplane for DTRU BTS (DCTB)
or DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.

Exterior
There are two types of cables that can be used to connect two combined base stations. Figure
7-87 shows the cable connected to the DCTB in the 3012 series base station.
Figure 7-87 Cable between two combined base stations (1)

(1) MD36 male connector

(2) DB15 male connector

Figure 7-88 shows the cable connected to the DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.
Figure 7-88 Cable between two combined base stations (2)

(1) DB15 male connector

Pin Assignment
As shown in Figure 7-87, the cable has a DB15 male connector at one end and an MD36 male
connector at the other end. Table 7-45 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.
Table 7-45 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (1)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Pin on the DB15


Male Connector

Pin on the MD36


Male Connector

Color

Wire Type

X1.1

X2.6

White

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.7

Blue

X1.3

X2.11

White

X1.4

X2.12

Orange

X1.5

X2.2

White

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Twisted pair

Twisted pair
271

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Pin on the DB15


Male Connector

Pin on the MD36


Male Connector

Color

X1.10

X2.3

Green

X1.6

X2.15

White

X1.11

X2.16

Brown

X1.12

X2.10

White

X1.15

X2.28

Gray

X1.shell

X2.shell

Shield

Wire Type

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

As shown in Figure 7-88, the cable has a DB15 male connector at both ends. Table 7-46 lists
the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.
Table 7-46 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (2)
Pin on the DB15
Male Connector

Pin on the DB15


Male Connector

Color

Wire Type

X1.1

X2.1

White

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.2

Blue

X1.3

X2.3

White

X1.4

X2.4

Orange

X1.5

X2.5

White

X1.10

X2.10

Green

X1.6

X2.6

White

X1.11

X2.11

Brown

X1.12

X2.12

White

X1.15

X2.15

Gray

X1.shell

X2.shell

Shield

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

7.6 BTS3900 RF Cable


The BTS3900 RF cables are the RF jumper and inter-RFU RF signal cable.

7.6.1 RF Jumper
The RF jumper connects the RFU and the feeder of the antenna system for signal exchange
between the base station and the antenna system. A fixed-length RF jumper is 2 m (6.56 ft), 3
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

m (9.84 ft), 4 m (13.12 ft), 6 m (19.68 ft), or 10 m (32.81 ft) long. A variable-length RF jumper
has a maximum length of 6 m (19.68 ft).

Exterior
Figure 7-89 shows an RF jumper.
Figure 7-89 RF jumper

(1) DIN straight male connector

(2) DIN elbow male connector

NOTE

Macro base stations use super-flexible 1/2-inch jumpers.

7.6.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal Cable


The inter-RFU RF signal cable is used for transmitting the received diversity signals between
two RFUs. The cable connects the RX IN port on one RFU and the RX OUT port on another
RFU.

Structure
Figure 7-90 shows the inter-RFU RF signal cable.
Figure 7-90 Inter-RFU RF signal cable

(1) QMA elbow male connector

7.7 CPRI Electrical Cable


The CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and the
RFU.
Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Exterior
The CPRI electrical cable is an SFP high speed transmission cable that has an SFP20 male
connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-91.
Figure 7-91 CPRI electrical cable

7.8 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable


CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multimode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber
optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.
Multimode fiber optic cables connect the BBU and RRU or interconnect two RRUs. The
maximum length of the multimode fiber optic cable between the BBU and RRU is 150 m (492.12
ft) and the multimode fiber optic cable between two RRUs has a fixed length of 10 m (32.81 ft).
A single-mode fiber optic cable consists of the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber
optic cable, and the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are
interconnected using the ODF. The maximum length of the single-mode pigtail is 20 m (65.62
ft) on BBU side and 70 m (229.66 ft) on RRU side.
NOTE

l The ODF and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are provided by the customer and must comply with
the ITU-T G.652 standard.
l The ODF is an outdoor transfer box for fiber optic cables, which interconnects the single-mode pigtail
and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable.
l A multimode fiber optic cable and a single-mode fiber optic cable are connected to a multimode optical
module and a single-mode optical module, respectively.

Exterior
Multimode fiber optic cable: The multimode fiber optic cable has a DLC connector at each end,
as shown in Figure 7-92.
Figure 7-92 Multimode fiber optic cable

(1) DLC connector

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

(2) Breakout cable

(3) Label on the breakout cable

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables
NOTE

l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cable on the BBU side
is 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and the breakout cable on the RRU side is 0.03 m (0.098 ft).
l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects two RRUs, the breakout cable on both sides is 0.03 m
(0.098 ft).

Figure 7-93 shows the connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an
RRU.
Figure 7-93 Connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

(1) Multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

Single-mode pigtail: The single-mode pigtail has a DLC connector at one end and an FC, LC,
or SC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-94.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-94 Single-mode pigtail

(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout


cable

(3) Label on the (4) FC connector (5) LC connector (6) SC connector


breakout cable

NOTE

l When a single-mode pigtail connects a BBU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the BBU side and
ODF side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.
l When a single-mode pigtail connects an RRU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the RRU side and
ODF side are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.

Figure 7-95 shows the connection of the single-mode pigtail.


Figure 7-95 Connection of the single-mode pigtail

(1) Single-mode pigtail between a BBU and an ODF (2) Single-mode pigtail between an RRU and an ODF

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

276

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Selection Principles
The following table describes the principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.
Table 7-47 Principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables
Remote
Distance

Selection Principle

Remarks

Less than or
equal to 100 m
(328.08 ft)

Multimode fiber optic cable

Connects the BBU and RRU

Greater than
100 m (328.08
ft) and equal to
or less than
150 m (492.12
ft)

Multimode fiber optic cable

Connects the BBU and RRU

Recommended: single-mode
fiber optic cable (single-mode
pigtail and trunk single-mode
fiber optic cable)

The single-mode pigtail at the RRU or BBU


side is connected to the trunk single-mode
fiber optic cable using the ODF.

Greater than
150 m (492.12
ft)

Single-mode fiber optic cable


(single-mode pigtail and trunk
single-mode fiber optic cable)

When it connects two RRUs, the distance


between the two RRUs must be equal to or
less than 10 m (32.81 ft).

Pin Assignment
Table 7-48 describes the labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a
CPRI fiber optic cable.
Table 7-48 Labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a CPRI fiber
optic cable
Label

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Installation Position
Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between a BBU
and an RRU

Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between Two
RRUs

Single-Mode Pigtail

1A

CPRI RX port on the


RRU

CPRI RX port on
RRU 1

RX port on the BBU or


CPRI RX port on the
RRU

1B

CPRI TX port on the


RRU

CPRI TX port on
RRU 1

TX port on the BBU or


CPRI TX port on the
RRU

2A

TX port on the BBU

CPRI TX port on
RRU 0

ODF

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

277

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Label

Installation Position

2B

Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between a BBU
and an RRU

Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between Two
RRUs

Single-Mode Pigtail

RX port on the BBU

CPRI RX port on
RRU 0

ODF

7.9 PGND Cables


The PGND cables are used to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet and the modules in the
cabinet. The maximum length of a PGND cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).

PGND Cable for the Cabinet


The PGND cable for the cabinet is green and yellow. Figure 7-96 shows the PGND cable for
the cabinet.
Figure 7-96 PGND cable for the cabinet

(1) OT terminal (25 mm2 or 16 mm2, M8)

NOTE

l For the BTS3900 (Ver.B) or BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, the cross-sectional area of the PGND cable is
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2).
l For the BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, the PGND cable with a cross-sectional area of 25 mm2 (0.039 in.
2) is required when one 160 A upper-level circuit breaker is used, and the PGND cable with a crosssectional area of 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) is required when two 80 A upper-level circuit breaker is used.

PGND Cable for the Modules


The PGND cable for the modules is green and yellow with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2.
Figure 7-97 shows the PGND cable for the modules.

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

278

BTS3900 (Ver.B)
Hardware Description

7 BTS3900 Cables

Figure 7-97 PGND cable for the modules

(1) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)

7.10 Equipotential Cable


When the battery cabinet is working with the power cabinet, one cabinet should be grounded
through connecting the equipotential cable to the other cabinet.

Structure
The equipotential cable is a single cable with OT terminals at both ends. It is a yellow and green
cable with cross-sectional area of 16 mm2. The OT terminals should be made on site.
Figure 7-98 show the equipotential cable.
Figure 7-98 Equipotential cable

(1) OT terminals (16 mm2, M6)

Issue 13 (2014-06-26)

(2) OT terminals (16 mm2, M8)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

279